Upload
jose-ramiro-hernandez
View
1.050
Download
172
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 1/376
So
LEC
luciones
ENTR
URA
a Siste
ENAM
E ME
as Elect
ENT
ORIA
rónicos
TEC
AUT
utomot
ICO
MOT
ices
ICES
mexico 008
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 2/376
LICZNIK LIST
LICZNIK LIST
ALFA ROMEO 146 HC05147 93c86147 ST6249156 HC11KG4 White156 HC11KG4 Black164 HC05166 93c56166 HC711
AUDI TT HC912100 93c46 VDO
A3 HC912 01A3 HC912 03A3 03 93c86A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v1A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v2A4 24c08 BOSCHA4 93c46 VDOA4 93c56A4 93c56 UKNSI 95
A4 93c56 UKNSI 97A4 93c56 UKNSI 98A4 93c56 z komp VDOA4 HC912A6 93c46 VDOA6 93c56 UKNSI 97A6 93c86 VDOA8 93c56 VDO 95A8 93c86 VDO 01
A8 03 93c86
BMW BMW 3 E36 91-98BMW 3 2 MemoryBMW 5 BlueBMW 5 Green IIC
CHRYSLER
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (1 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 3/376
LICZNIK LIST
PT Cruser HC912
CITROEN Berlingo HC08C2 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 )C3 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 )C5 Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + 68HC912 )
Evasion HC05H12Jumper 95040Jumpi HC08Xantia 93c46Xara 03 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 )Xara 93c46Xara Picasso 2003Xara Picasso 93c66Xara Picasso v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 )
Xara Picasso v2 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + uPD780949 )
DACIA Logan Sagem 93c56
DAEWOO Kalos HC05H12Matiz HC05H12
FIAT
Brava 93c56 YazMeterBrava HC(7)05Brava HC05E6Brava HC08Brava HC11KG4Brava ST6249Doblo 95040Ducato 25040Marea HC08
Multipla 93c56 v1Multipla 93c56 v2Palio 95040Panda 95040Punto2 25040Punto2 25020Punto2 HC08 z obr.Punto2 HC08 bez obr.Punto3 95040
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (2 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 4/376
LICZNIK LIST
Scudo HC08Scudo 95040Seicento 25020Seicento 25040Stilo HC912D60Tempra 93c46 v1Tempra 93c46 v2
Tempra 93c06Tipo Veglia 93c46Tipo Borg 93c46Tempra Borg 93c46
FORD Escort HC11Fiesta HC11Fiesta NEC uPD780973
Focus HC11Galaxy HC11Puma HC11Scorpio HC11WinStar HC11Ecoline 9S12DT256CEscape 9S12H128Expedition 68HC912D60Explorer 68HC912DG128
Explorer 68HC912D60Explorer 9S12DP256Fiesta 24c08Focus 24c16Focus 9S12H128Focus 06 24c16Focus C-Max 3M5T 9S12H256Focus C-Max 4M5T 9S12H256Fusion 24c08Fusion 06 93c66Galaxy VDO v1 93c86Galaxy VDO v2 93c86Mondeo 68HC912D60Transit 24c16Transit Kiencle 93c66Transit Kiencle 93c66 CRC
HONDA
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (3 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 5/376
LICZNIK LIST
Accord 93c56Civic 01 93c56HRV 93c46Jazz 93c56Legend 93c46Shuttle 93c46
HYUNDAI Matrix 93c46Santa Fe 93c46Hyundai NEC µPD780828
VECO Iveco 93s56
KIA Carnival 93c46Clarus 93c46Rio 93c46Sorento 93c46Sportage 93c46
LANCIA K Veglia Borletti HC11KG4K Veglia Borletti TMS370
Libra Jaeger HC11KG4
MAZDA
121 Visteon HC11E20323/626 v1 93c56323/626 v2 93c56323/626 v1 93c46323/626 v2 93c46Premacy 93c56
626 01 93c56MPV 93c46
MITSUBISHI Carisma 93c46Colt 93c46Lancer 98 93c46Pajero 93c46SpaceStar 93c46
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (4 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 6/376
LICZNIK LIST
Galant 93c46Outlander 03 93cs56Pajero 93c56Space Wagon 93c46Shogun 93c46
MERCEDES
A Class 98 HC11KG4A Class 00 HC912A Class Dash + BCU ( 93c66 + 68HC05 )Actros tachoC Class 93c56C Class 95 93c56E Class 00 93c86E Class 93c56Motometer
SLK/CLK 93c56Smart VDO 93c66Sprinter Kienzle 24c02Sprinter 24c02Sprinter 93s46VDO 93c56/93c66Vito CDI JaegerVito CDI tachoVito 04 ST95080
Vito tachoVito 05 ST95080
NISSAN Primera 93c46Micra 93c46Micra 93c66
OPEL Astra H M35080
Astra VDO 93c56Astra TRWFrontera DELCO Atmel 752Vectra B 93c46Vectra C 93c66Astra VDO 93c46Omega 93c46Senator 93c46Signum 93c66
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (5 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 7/376
LICZNIK LIST
Montery 99 93c46Opel NEC µPD780828Zafira TRW 24c02Zafira VDO 93c56
PEUGEOT 206 Jaeger 2002
206 Jaeger HC05H12206 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 )306 Sagem v1 93c56306 Sagem v2 93c56406 BSI v1 93c66406 BSI v2 93c66406 v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 93c66 )406 Jaeger HC05406 Sagem 93c46
607 VDO806 Jaeger HC05H12Expert Jaeger HC08Partner Jaeger 2003Partner Jaeger HC08Partner 03 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 )Partner Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + µPD780949 )
RENAULT
Clio III Sagem 25020Clio Jaeger HC08Clio Sagem 93c46Clio 04 93c56Espace Jaeger TMS370Espace 2002Espace 2003 93c56Kangoo Jaeger HC08Kangoo Sagem 93c46
Laguna Jaeger TMS370Laguna Sagem v1 93c46Laguna Jaeger HC08Laguna Jaeger HC12Master 2004 93c66Megane Jaeger HC08AB32Megane Jaeger HC11KG4Megane Sagem 93c46Megane Visteon 93c56
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (6 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 8/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 9/376
LICZNIK LIST
Ardeo Denso 93c46Aristo Denso 93c46Avalon Denso 98 93c46Avalon VDO 93c56Avensis Denso 93c46Avensis Yazaki 93c46Avensis VDO 93c56
Camry 96-03 93c46Camry Denso 05 93c56Camry Yazaki 93c46Carina Yazaki 93c46Caldina Yazaki 93c46Celica Denso 00-02 93c46Chaser Denso 93c46Corolla Denso 93c46Corolla Sagem 93c46
Corolla VDO 93s56Corolla VDO 93c56Corona Yazaki 93c46Cressida 97-99 93c46Crown Denso 93c46Duet Denso 93c46Echo Denso 93c46Estima 96 93c46Fielder Denso 93c46
Ipsum 96 93c46Forerunner Yazaki 93c56Forerunner v1 93c66Forerunner v2 93c66Fucargo 99-01 93c46HighLander 01 93c46Harrier Denso 93c46HDJ100 Yazaki 93c56Hiace Yazaki 93c46
Kluger Denso 93c56LandCruiser 90 93c56LandCruiser 100 93c56Prada/Prado 93c56Prada/Prado 93c66RAV 4 96-01 93c46Yaris 93c46
VOLVO
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (8 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 10/376
LICZNIK LIST
850 v1 93c46850 v2 93c46850 93c56S40 93c56S70 97 93c56S60 01 HC12S70 00 HC908
S70 00 HC12S70 01 HC12S80 00 HC908S80 01 HC12V40 93c56 UKNSI
VW Bora VDO 93c86Caddy VDO 24c16
Caddy VDO 24c32Corrado Motometer 93c56Corrado VDO 93c56Golf 3 Diesel 93c46Golf 3 Motometer v1 93c56Golf 3 Motometer v2 93c56Golf 3 TRW 93c46Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v1Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v2
Golf 4 Motometer 24c02Golf 4 VDO 00 93c86Golf 4 VDO 01 93c86Golf 4 VDO 93c46Golf 4 VDO 93c66Golf 5 24c16Golf 5 24c32Lupo 24c02LT35 24c02 tachoLT35 93s46Passat B5 VDO v1 93c66Passat B5 VDO v2 93c66Passat 95 93c56Passat B6 VDO v1 93c86Passat B6 VDO v2 93c86Passat B6 VDO v3 93c86Passat GT 93c46Passat GT 93c56
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (9 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 11/376
LICZNIK LIST
Passat Jaeger v1 68HC711KG2Passat Jaeger v2 68HC711KG2Passat Motometer 24c08Passat Motometer 93c56Passat Motometer 96 93c56Passat VD202 93c46Passat VDO 91 93c56
Passat B7 24c32Polo Motometer 24c02Polo Motometer 93c46Polo VDO 01 93c86Polo VDO 02 93c86Polo VDO 96-98 93c46Sharan 68HC11E9Sharan VDO v1 93c86Sharan VDO v2 93c86
Sharan VDO v3 93c86Touran VDO v1 24c16Touran VDO v2 24c16Touran VDO 24c32T4 Motometer 93c56T4 VDO 93c66T5 VDO 03 93c86T5 VDO v1 93c86T5 VDO v2 93c86
Tuareg 24c08Tuareg 93c46Vento TRW 93c46Vento VDO 93c46Motometer 24c02 #10Motometer 24c02 #20Motometer 24c02 #30Motometer 24c02 #40Motometer 24c02 #50
Motometer 24c02 #60Polo Motometer 02 24c02Phaeton v1 24c08Phaeton v2 24c08
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (10 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 12/376
IMMO KILLER
MMO KILLER - podporované jednotky
Alfa Romeo 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04Audi A3,A4,A6 Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)BMW Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen IAW G6.14 - Magneti MarelliCitroen Berlingo - BSI - MCU NECCitroen C3- BSI - MEM 95160Citroen Xara - BSI - MEM 95040Citroen Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040Citroen EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)Citroen SID 803 PIN calculator (95320)Citroen SID 803 PIN programmer (95320)Daewoo Siemens TMS374iat Bosch - 24C02iat IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Mirelli
iat IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelliiat 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3iat BPKA DELCO HC11F1iat Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11iat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9iat IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9iat IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1iat IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374iat IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374
iat IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374iat IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374iat IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374iat IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040iat IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160iat IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160iat IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160iat IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)iat IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)
http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (1 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 13/376
IMMO KILLER
iat IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)iat IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)iat IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160iat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1iat IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11iat Lucas DCU3F 95080veco Daily Bosch 24C16
Kia Siemens TMS374Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ?Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2Mercedes Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECUMercedes Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECUMercedes Start Error - SprinterMercedes Start Error - Vito HC05Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC08Mercedes Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU
Opel Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)Opel DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)Opel DTL - BoschOpel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356Opel 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)Opel 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo)Opel Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)eugeot MP5.1.1 - Bosch
eugeot S2000 - Sagemeugeot BSI - De/encryptioneugeot ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.eugeot EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog.eugeot EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog.eugeot EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)eugeot EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)eugeot 206 BSI - MCU HC912eugeot 206 BSI - MEM 95160
eugeot 307 BSI - MCU HC912eugeot 307 BSI - MEM 95160eugeot 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3eugeot ECU SAGEM S2000 PIN progr.eugeot IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374eugeot IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374eugeot IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374eugeot IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374eugeot IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (2 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 14/376
IMMO KILLER
eugeot IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400eugeot IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCUeugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512eugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512olonez Delco HC11F1
Renault 5NR.CE1 - Magneti MarelliRenault DCI - Bosch
Renault DCI - DelphiRenault DCU3R - Lucas, Clear ImmoRenault DCU3R - Lucas, Remove ImmoRenault SIRIUS32 - SiemensRenault SIRIUS34 - SiemensRenault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug)Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)Renault Fenix 3 95160Renault IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
Renault IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370Renault IAW5NR2.C5 95160Renault S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEMRenault Siemens TMS374Renault Siemens TMS374Renault Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)Rover 214,216 93C46koda SIMOS - Siemens
Toyota Land Cruiser 93LC66
Toyota YarisDenso 93C46V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - SiemensV.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - SiemensV.A.G IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - ValeoV.A.G IMMO VW LT - HC05X16V.A.G IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g MegamosV.A.G EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)V.A.G. EDC16 Bosch 95320V.A.G. TDI - Bosch
V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (1 plug) BoschV.A.G. TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch
http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (3 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 15/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
GTI-TDI Forum » FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden »
Tachonummern» Hallo Gast [ Anmelden|Registrieren]
Letzter Beitrag | Erster ungelesener Beitrag Druckvorschau | An Freund senden | Thema zu Favoriten hinzufügen
Tachonummern
Autor Beitrag « Vorheriges Thema | Nächstes Thema »
firebird73
Mitglied
Dabei seit: 05.03.2006Beiträge: 49Herkunft: 1120 Wien /Österreich
Tachonummern
Vielleicht ist das ja für euch von Interesse, hab ich im Internet gefunden. AUDI
A3
8L0919860A - Audi A3 VDO with 93C66 EEPROM8L0919860D - Audi A3 with 93C66 - VDO110.008.894/001
A4
AUDI A4 - 8D0919033A - UK NSI - 93C56 - sw B
AUDI A4 - 8D0919033P - VDO - 93C56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919860E - JAPAN with 93LC56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919861A - UK-NSI with 93LC56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919861C - 1998 - VDO 110.008.884/002 - AUZ7Z0 AUDI A4 - 8D0919910Q - 1999 - VDO - 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920860E - VDO year 1997 with 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920880E - B5-VDO year 1997 with 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920900H - 1999/2000y. - VDO 110.008.938/006 - AUZ7Z0 AUDI A4 - 8D0920930 - 1999- dash Magneti Marelli with HC912 AUDI A4 - 8D0920931 - VDO AUDI A4 - 8E0920900G - 2001
AUDI A4 - UK NSI new - 1996 - 93C56 - sw A Audi A4 VDO
A6
AUDI A6 - 1995-2,8i - 93C46 - VDO AUDI A6 - 4A1919033HG - 1997- 93C46 - VDO AUDI A6 - 4B0919-900C,F,G,M,930A,K,931B,932K,L,Q - AUZ7Z0 with 93C86 AUDI A6 - 4B0919860F - JAPAN with 93LC56 AUDI A6 - 4B0919860L - UK-NSI with 93LC56 sw A AUDI A6 - 4B0919880G - AUW0 with 93C66
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (1 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 16/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 17/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
GOLF III - 1H0919861E - TRW 93C46GOLF III - 1H0919864Q - TRW 93C46GOLF III - 1H0919860A year 96 TRW 93C46GOLF III - 1H0919860H - CL-TDI- 94 TRW 93C46GOLF III - 1H0919860T - 1,9TD 93C56 MotometerGOLF III - 1H0919861B - 1,9D - 1997- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.1GOLF III - 1H0919864J - 1995 - VDO - 93C46GOLF III - 1H0919880A - 2,0i 8V- 95 TRW 93C46GOLF III - 1H6919033A - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46
GOLF III - 1H6919033BD - 1,9TD r.v.1993 VDO - 93C46GOLF III - 1H6919033M - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46GOLF III 1,9D - 1992- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.8GOLF IV - 1J0920820B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920820C - 93C86 - 1997 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J5920825C - 93C86 VDOGOLF IV - 1J0919860 - 93C66GOLF IV - 1J0919860D - VWV - 24C02 - 1999 - MOTOMETERGOLF IV - 1J0919860D - VWX - 24C02 MOTOMETERGOLF IV - 1J0919861D - 24C02 - 1,6SR 1999 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0919880B-MMO - 24C02 - Motometer
GOLF IV - 1J0919881B - 24C02 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0919881D - 24C02GOLF IV - 1J0919911 - MMO - 24C02 MOTOMETERGOLF IV - 1J0919931D - 93C66GOLF IV - 1J0920801E - 24C02 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920802G BOO version - 24C02 - 1999 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920805E - 24C02 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920805F - 93C86 - VDO - 2001GOLF IV - 1J0920805G - 24C02 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920806B - V02 - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920806B-PV - 24C02 - Motometer
GOLF IV - 1J0920806C - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920806E - engine 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920821A - 24C02 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920821B - year 1999 dash VDO with 93C86GOLF IV - 1J0920822C - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920825 - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920825B - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920826A - 24C08 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - MotometerGOLF IV - 1J0920846C - 2002-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920906J - GTi - 2002-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J0920925A - 24C02 - 2001 - Motometer
GOLF IV - 1J0920926F - 93C86 - VDO - American model (MPH)GOLF IV - 1J0920991A - 93C66GOLF IV - 1J5920806G - 2003-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J5920826 - 2003-93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J5920826B - 2001-93C86 - VDO2GOLF IV - 1J5920826C - 2003-93C86GOLF IV - 1J5920845C - 93C86 - VDOGOLF IV - 1J5920846A - 2002-93C86 - VDOGOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850E - 2003GOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850F - 2003GOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850L - 2003
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (3 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 18/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
GOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850P - 2004GOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920860K - 2003GOLF V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920860L - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920851A - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920851B - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920851F - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920851H - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920861 - 2004GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920861M - 2005GOLF V - 24C32 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920961B - 2005
JETTA
JETTA - 1K0 920 971C - 24C32 - VDO - 2005JETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920806L - 2002-93C86 - VDOJETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920906K - 2002-93C86 - VDO (USA version)LUPO
VW LUPO - 6X0920801D - BOO - 24C02 - Motometer
PASSAT PASSAT - 357919033FC - 1993 - VDO - 93C46PASSAT B4 - 3A0919860H - 1,9TDi - Motometer - 93C56 y.1996PASSAT B5 - 3B1919860C - V018 with 93C66PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880D - VWW1 with 93C66PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880G - VWW1 with 93C66PASSAT B5 - 3B1919890J - VWW0 with 93C66
VW PASSAT - 1J0919860B - 93C66 VW PASSAT - 1J0920842B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT - 3A0919033R - 93C56 Motometer - 94year VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A B5 VDO V20 version !!!! - 93C86 - 1998 VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A BOO V18 version !!!! - 24C02 - 1999 - Motometer VW PASSAT - 3B0920822A - 93C86 - 2000y - VDO VW PASSAT - 3B0920847E - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920846AX - 93C86 - VDO - 2001 VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920926B - 93C86 - VDO - 2001 VW PASSAT B5 (B5V06) - 3B0920927A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920805A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920847A - 93C86 - 2001 - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829A-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920929B-B5V03 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5V1 1997y. VDO 3B0 920 861B - 93C66 VW PASSAT B5V11 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5V2 - VDO 3B0919881N - 93C66 VW PASSAT B6 (B6V08 ) - 3B0920827A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B6 - 3B0920807A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870G - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870L - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT B7 -2006- VD1 3C0 920 870A - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 2U0035860 - (860D) VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 3B0919880A
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (4 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 19/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - sw V13AC or V11AB - 3B0919861 VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 (B5) Magneti Marelli - VAG> 3B0919860D
POLO
VW POLO - 6K9 920 806B - 2000y. - 24C04 - TRW VW POLO - 6N0 919 860P - 1995 Motometer - 93S56 VW POLO - 6N0 919 860R - year 1996 Motometer - 1,4i - 93S56 VW POLO - 6N0 919 861A - Motometer 24C02
VW POLO - 6N9 920 804D - 24C04 - TRW VW POLO - 6Q0 920 800 - 2002 VDO 93C86 VW POLO - 6Q0 920 800M - VDO - 93C86 VW POLO - 6Q0 920 800P - year 2002 VDO 93C86 VW POLO - 6Q0 920 900H - year 2002 VDO 93C86 VW POLO 1,4MPi / 1997 - dash 6K9 919 033AK - VDO with 93C46 VW POLO 1,9TD / 1996 - dash Motometer with 93C66
SHARAN
Sharan 2 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2002 - VDO
VW Sharan - 7M0 919 882D - with Motorola HC11E9 VW Sharan - 7M1 919 863B - with Motorola HC11E9 VW Sharan - 7M1 919 881 - with Motorola HC11A20 VW Sharan - 7M3 920 820C - 93C86 - 2000 VW Sharan - 7M3920840N - 93C86 - VDO VW Sharan - 7M5920800EX - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
TOUAREG
TOUAREG - 2004 - 2,5TDi - 7L6 920 880M - BOSCHTOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 870LTOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 880N - BOSCH
TOURAN
Touran - 1T0 920 850A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003Touran - 1T0 920 860A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003Touran - 1T0 920 860C - 24C16 - VDO - 2003Touran - 1T0 920 860G - 24C16 - VDO - 2003Touran - 1T0 920 861A - 24C32 - VDO - 2004-2005Touran - 1T0 920 870F - 24C16 - VDO - 2005
23.04.2006 19:03
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (5 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 20/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
pepi Routinier
Dabei seit: 09.11.2005Beiträge: 360Herkunft: vilnius lt
verschiedene für SEAT und SKODA Freunde
SEAT ALHAMBRA - 7M0920821H - 68HC11E20 (3E82K)
ALHAMBRA - 7M0919862B - 68HC11E20 (3E82K) ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840C - VDO - 93C86 ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840H - VDO - 93C86 AROSA - . . . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02CORDOBA - 6K0920821E - VDO - 93C66CORDOBA - . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . VDO - 93C46IBIZA - 6K0920850F - VDO - 93C66IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . . -VDO - 93C46INCA - 6K0919033FE - VDO - 93C46INCA - 6K0919033HP - VDO - 93C46
INCA - 6K0920850 - VDO - 93C66LEON - 1M0920800 - VDO - 93C86LEON - 1M0920820 - VDO - 93C86LEON - 1M0920821B - VDO - 93C86LEON - 1M0920822E - VDO - 93C86TOLEDO -VDO992655681 - VDO - 93C46TOLEDO -1M0920801B - VDO - 93C86
SKODAFABIA - 6Y0920860M - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y0920880M - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1919870B - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1919870C - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1919870D - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1919880D - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1920870H - VDO - 93C86FABIA - 6Y1920880H - VDO- 93C86FELICIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86FELICIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920810F - VDO - 93C86OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86OKTAVIA - 1U1919033A - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919033C - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919033G - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919033J - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919033L - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919034A - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919034B - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919034C - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919034G - VDO - 93C66
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (6 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 21/376
GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern
OKTAVIA - 1U1919034L - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U1919034S - VDO - 93C66OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86OKTAVIA - 1U0920811F - VDO - 93C86SUPERB - 3UO920810C - VDO - 93C86SUPERB - 3U0920811A - VDO - 93C86SUPERB - 3U0920840A - VDO - 93C86
23.04.2006 21:17
Baumstruktur | Brettstruktur
Gehe zu:
GTI-TDI Forum » FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden » Tachonummern
Forensoftware: Burning Board 2.3.3, entwickelt von WoltLab GmbH
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (7 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]
FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 22/376
ECU list ver 18_01_08-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove Immo - ECU works without immoNo description - ECU cleared and prepared for coding / autocoding-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alfa Romeo 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04Audi A3,A4,A6 Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)BMW Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)Chrysler Voyager 2.5 TD, Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)Citroen IAW G6.14 - Magneti MarelliCitroen Berlingo - BSI - MCU NECCitroen C3- BSI - MEM 95160Citroen Xara - BSI - MEM 95040Citroen Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040Citroen EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)Citroen MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)Citroen SID 803 PIN calculator (95320)Citroen SID 803 PIN programmer (95320)Daewoo Siemens TMS374Fiat Bosch - 24C02Fiat IAW 16F.EB - Magneti MirelliFiat IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti MarelliFiat 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3Fiat BPKA DELCO HC11F1Fiat Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9Fiat IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9Fiat IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1Fiat IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
Fiat IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374Fiat IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374Fiat IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374Fiat IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374Fiat IAW 1G7SP.71 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 (c/rimmo)Fiat IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040Fiat IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160Fiat IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160Fiat IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160Fiat IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)Fiat IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)Fiat IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)Fiat IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)Fiat IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1Fiat IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11Fiat Lucas DCU3F 95080Iveco Daily Bosch 24C16Kia Clarus 2.0 16V Bosch 24C02Kia Siemens TMS374Mazda 323 Diesel Denso 93C56Mercedes A class - Siemens/VDO 29F200Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ?Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2Mercedes Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECUMercedes Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECUMercedes Start Error - SprinterMercedes Start Error - Sprinter (EWS OK)Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC05
Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC08Mercedes Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU
Página 1
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 23/376
ECU list ver 18_01_08Opel Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)Opel DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)Opel DTL - BoschOpel Motronic based on 24C02 - BoschOpel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356Opel 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)
Opel 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (RemoveImmo)Opel Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)Peugeot MP5.1.1 - BoschPeugeot S2000 - Sagem (95080)Peugeot S2000 RPM - Sagem (95080)Peugeot S2000 - Sagem (95080) PIN progr.Peugeot BSI - De/encryptionPeugeot ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.Peugeot ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc.Peugeot EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog.Peugeot EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog.Peugeot EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)Peugeot EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)
Peugeot 206 BSI - MCU HC912Peugeot 206 BSI - MEM 95160Peugeot 307 BSI - MCU HC912Peugeot 307 BSI - MEM 95160Peugeot 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3Peugeot IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374Peugeot IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374Peugeot IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374Peugeot IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374Peugeot IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374Peugeot IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400Peugeot IAW 6LP2.02 Magneti Marelli ST10F280Peugeot IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCUPeugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512Peugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
Polonez Delco HC11F1Renault 5NR.XX - Magneti MarelliRenault DCI - BoschRenault DCI - DelphiRenault DCI - Delphi (remove crash blockade)Renault DCU3R - Lucas, Clear ImmoRenault DCU3R - Lucas, Remove ImmoRenault Megane 2 (clear steering lock) 24C04Renault SIRIUS32 - SiemensRenault SIRIUS34 - SiemensRenault SIRIUS35 - SiemensRenault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug), (RemoveImmo)Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)Renault Fenix 3 95160
Renault IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370Renault IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370Renault IAW5NR2.XX 95160Renault S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEMRenault Siemens TMS374Renault Siemens TMS374Renault Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)Rover 214,216 93C46Skoda SIMOS - SiemensToyota 93LC66 + Texas 4C (Key programmer)Toyota YarisDenso 93C46V.A.G EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)V.A.G. EDC16 Bosch 95320V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - SiemensV.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens
V.A.G IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - ValeoV.A.G IMMO VW LT - HC05X16
Página 2
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 24/376
ECU list ver 18_01_08V.A.G IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g MegamosV.A.G. ME7.1.(x) - 7.5.(x) Remove Immo Bosch95040V.A.G. SIMOS - Siemens, 93C76, (Remove Immo)V.A.G. TDI - BoschV.A.G. TDI 24C02 (1 plug) Bosch
V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch
Página 3
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 25/376
Eliminazione IMMO CODE – Riverginatura file – Adattamento
per preparazione all’auto-ricodifica- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Alfa Romeo - 2. 4 J TD Bosch 24C04 5 connet t or i Alfa Romeo 156 - ECU - BOSCH Twi n Spar k, Remove I mmo Alfa Romeo - ECU - BOSCH 0 261 204 772 - 24C02 memor y
Audi A3,A4,A6 - Bosch 1. 8 Tur bo 24C02 ( Remove I mmo)
BMW - Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 ( Remove I mmo)
Citroen - I AW G6. 14 - Magnet i Mar el l iCitroen - MP 5. 2 Bosch 93S46 ( Remove I mmo)Citroen - MA 3. 1 Bosch 24C04 ( Remove I mmo)Citroen - EDC15 5P08C3 ( Remove I mmo)
Daewoo - Si emens TMS374
Fiat - I AW 4AF. M9 - Magnet i Mar el l iFiat - I AW 16F. EB - Magnet i Mar el l iFiat - Bosch - 24C02Fiat - I AW 1ABB. 92 TMS374Fiat - Hi t achi MFI 003BC2 59C11Fiat - 2. 3 J TD Bosch 5P08C3Fiat - BPKA DELCO HC11F1Fiat - I AW 18F. B4 Magnet i Marel l i HC11F1Fiat - I AW 49F. B4 Magnet i Mar el l i 95040Fiat - I AW 8F. 5T Magnet i Mar el l i HC11E9Fiat - I AW 8F. 6B Magnet i Marel l i HC11E9Fiat - I AW 4AF. M1 Magnet i Marel l i 95160
Fiat - I AW 4AF. M7 Magnet i Marel l i 95160Fiat - I AW 4AF. S2 Magnet i Mar el l i 95160Fiat - I AW 5NF. T1 Magnet i Mar el l i 95160Fiat - I AW 8P. 22 Magnet i Mar el l i HC11Fiat - Lucas DCU3F 95080Fiat - I AW 8F. 5T Magnet i Marel l i HC11F1Fiat - I AW 1AF. 13 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Fiat - I AW 1AF. 15 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Fiat - I AW 1AF. 17 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Fiat - I AW 1ABG. 81 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374
Iveco Daily - Bosch 24C16
Mercedes - St art Err or - Spri nt er Mercedes - St ar t Er r or - Vi t o HC05 Mercedes - St ar t Er r or - Vi t o HC08 Mercedes - C, E cl ass ( i nf r a- r ed) - ECU pr ogr . 1/ 2 Mercedes - C, E cl ass ( i nf r a- r ed) - I mmo pr ogr . 2/ 2 Mercedes - Spr i nter 24C02 - Unl ock ECU Mercedes - Spr i nter 5P08C3 - Unl ock ECU Mercedes - Vi t o 24C04 - Unl ock ECU Mercedes - A Cl ass Si emens/ VDO ( 29F200)
Kia - Si emens TMS374
Opel - DTL - Bosch
Opel - DELCO HC11F1 2 pl ugs ( r ed, whi t e)Opel - Del co HC11F1 2 pl ugs ( bl ue, gr ey)Opel - Si emens SI MTEC 56. 1 93C56Opel - Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 26/376
Opel - Si emens SI MTEC 56. 1 - 29F010 ( Remove I mmo)Opel - 1. 7 ; 2. 0 16V Tur bo Di esel 24C04 ( Remove I mmo)Opel - 1. 2 8V Del co 27C256 ( Remove I mmo)
Peugeot - S2000 - SagemPeugeot - MP5. 1. 1 - Bosch
Peugeot - I AW 1AP. 80, 81, 40 TMS374Peugeot - Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512Peugeot - Magnet i Marel l i I AW 8P. XX HC11A8 MCUPeugeot - 2. 3 J TD Bosch 5P08C3Peugeot - I AW 1AP. 20, 90 TMS374Peugeot - I AW 48P2. XX Magnet i Marel l i 29F400Peugeot - I AW 1AP. 41 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Peugeot - I AW 1AP. 43 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Peugeot - I AW 1AP. 83 Magnet i Marel l i TMS374Peugeot - Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512Peugeot - S2000 RPM Sagem ( 95080)
Polonez - Del co HC11F1
PSA Group - MP 7. 2 Bosch Remove I mmo ( 24C02)PSA Group - MP 7. 3 Bosch Remove I mmo ( 24C02)PSA Group - MA 3. 0 Bosch Remove I mmo ( 93CS46)PSA Group - MA 3. 1 Bosch Remove I mmo ( 93CS46)PSA Group - MP 3. 2 Bosch Remove I mmo ( 93CS46)
Rover - 214, 216 ( 93C46)
Renault - DCI - BoschRenault - DCI - Del phiRenault - DCU3R - Lucas, Cl ear I mmoRenault - DCU3R - Lucas, Remove I mmoRenault - SI RI US32 - Si emensRenault - SI RI US34 - Si emensRenault - 5NR. CE1 - Magnet i Mar el l iRenault - Si emens TMS374Renault - Feni x 3 95160Renault - I AW5NR2. C5 95160Renault - Si emens TMS374Renault - 1. 9 DTI Bosch 24C04 ( 2 pl ugs)Renault - 1. 9 DTI Bosch 24C04 ( 1 pl ug)Renault - I AW 6R. 20 Magnet i Marel l i TMS370Renault - I AW 6R. 30 Magnet i Marel l i TMS370Renault - Si r i us32 ( 16V) 29F200 ( Remove I mmo)Renault - S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM
Skoda - SI MOS - Si emens
Toyota Yaris - Denso 93C46Toyota Land Cruiser - 93LC66
V.A.G. - TDI - Bosch V.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 ( 1 pl ug) V.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 ( 2 pl ugs) V.A.G. – EDC15 Remove I mmo ( 24c04) V.A.G. - EDC16 Remove I mmo ( 95320)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 27/376
Calcolo PIN / Programmazione PIN- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Audi A2 - PI N decoder l oaded 93C86- 16
CITROEN Berlingo - BSI - MCU NECCITROEN C3 - BSI - MEM 95160CITROEN Xara - BSI - MEM 95040CITROEN Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040
PEUGEOT / CITROEN - BSI - De/ encrypt i onPEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PI N prog.PEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 16 - 95160 PI N prog.PEUGEOT / CITROEN - ECU Bosch ME7. 4. 4 PI N progr .PEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC15 PI N cal cul ator ( 5P08C3)PEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC16 PI N cal cul ator ( 95160)
PEUGEOT 206 - BSI - MEM 95160PEUGEOT 206 - BSI - MCU HC912PEUGEOT 307 - BSI - MCU HC912PEUGEOT 307 - BSI - MEM 95160PEUGEOT - ECU SAGEM S2000 PI N progr .
PSA - SI D 803 ( Si emens) PI N cal cul at or ( 95320)PSA - SI D 803 ( Si emens) PI N progr ammer( 95320)
V.A.G. - EDC16 Bosch 95320 V.A.G. - I MMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Si emens V.A.G. - I MMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Si emens V.A.G. - I MMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Val eo V.A.G. - I MMO VWLT - HC05X16 V.A.G. - I MMO Whi t e box - 93C46 - f +g Megamos
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 28/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
*************************************************************************
Immo Tool - Universal ECU / IMMO dump repair tool
*************************************************************************
*************************************************************************
oftware version 2.08.07
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - Sirius 35 clear immo (29F400)
enault - Sirius 34 clear immo (29F200) type 1
enault - Megane 2 clear Steering loock (24C04)
eugeot - IAW6LP2.02 MM clear immo ST10F280
oftware version 17.03.07
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - 1.9 DTI Bosch (1 plug) (NEW ALGO-Remove Immo)
.A.G - SIMOS, Siemens, remove immo (93C76)
oftware version 11.03.07
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
iat - IAW 1G7SP.71 MM, clear/remove immo (HC11F1)
iat - IAW 59F.M2,M3,M7,M9 (NEW ALGO) (95080)
iat - IAW AF.M1,M7,M9,S2 (NEW ALGO) (95160)
iat - IAW 5NF.T1 (NEW ALGO) (95160)
iat - IAW 1ABB.92 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
iat - IAW 1ABG.81 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
iat - IAW 1AF.1G (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
iat - IAW 1AF.13,15,17 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
enault - Sirius 34 (NEW ALGO) (29F400)
enault - 1,5 DCI (remove crash blockade) (ST10F280+95160)
oftware version 15.01.07
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
MW - SIEMENS MS 41.0 DME
hrysler Voyager - Bosch 24c02 remove immo
IA - CLARUS 2.0 16V Bosch (24C02)
azda - 323 Diesel, Denso ECU (93C56)ercedes - Start Error (5P08C3) - WSP OK
PEL - Motronic based on 24C02
.A.G. - ME7.1.(x)-7.5.(x) Bosch Remove Immo (95040)
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (1 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 29/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
EUGEOT / CITROEN - ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
User interface changes
*************************************************************************
oftware version 2.08.06
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
.A.G - EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)
SA - MP 7.2 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)
SA - MP 7.3 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)
SA - MA 3.0 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
SA - MA 3.1 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
SA - MP 3.2 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
eugeot - S2000 RPM Sagem (95080)
ercedes Benz - A Class Siemens/VDO (29F200)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
SA - SID 803 (Siemens) PIN calculator (95320)
SA - SID 803 (Siemens) PIN programmer(95320)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 16.06.06
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
udi A3,A4,A6 - Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)
MW - Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)
itroen - MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
itroen - MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)
pel - 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo)
pel - 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)
eugeot - Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.XX HC11A8 MCU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
eugeot / Citroen - EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)
eugeot / Citroen - EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (2 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 30/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
User interface changes
BB nr1 firmware update, Bus busy detection
*************************************************************************
oftware version 18.04.06
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
itroen - EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)
iat - IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1
iat - IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374
iat - IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374
iat - IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374
iat - IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374
pel - Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010
pel - Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)
eugeot - IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374
eugeot - IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374
eugeot - IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
eugeot - Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
enault - Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)
enault - S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM
.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 (1 plug)
.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 (2 plugs)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ew BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.3)
95P08/5P08C3 memory programmer support added (BB nr1)
Buffer verify function added
Large user interface changes
*************************************************************************
oftware version 30.12.05 - last upate in 2005 :)
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
pel - Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)
pel - Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (3 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 31/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
eugeot - IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400
IAT - Lucas DCU3F 95080
veco Daily - Bosch 24C16
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
uto programm mode selector function added
uick P.S voltage selector
SB/RS232 converters support improvements
erifivation errors algo changes
ew BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.2)
Added 24C128, 24C256 I2C memory support
Added uWire 9346,56,66,86 - 8 and 16 mode memory support
Added SPI 95010, 95020, 95040 memory support
RS232 transparent mode added
Bootloader protocol changes
*************************************************************************
oftware version 11.12.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
enault - IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
yte swap function added.
ront end changes.
rogrammer comunication protocol changes
*************************************************************************
oftware version 16.11.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
ercedes - Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU
ercedes - Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU
ercedes - Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
reate bin file function added.
creen dump function added.
r 16 programmer.
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (4 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 32/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
*************************************************************************
oftware version 26.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
rag & Drop support
arameter start-up
niversal file contents XOR procedure
*************************************************************************
oftware version 19.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
iat - IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)
iat - IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)
iat - IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)
iat - IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 19.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
iat - BPKA DELCO HC11F1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
bliczanie/programowanie PIN.
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
.A.G - IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens
.A.G - IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens
.A.G - IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo
.A.G - IMMO VW LT - HC05X16
.A.G - IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g Megamos
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
2C programmer (Hardware requiered BB nr1)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 8.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
iat - IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (5 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 33/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
iat - IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040
iat - IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9
iat - IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9
*************************************************************************
oftware version 7.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug)
eugeot - IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374
iat - IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160
iat - IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160
iat - IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160
iat - IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
iat - IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11
*************************************************************************
oftware version 6.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
.A.G. - EDC16 Bosch 95320
*************************************************************************
oftware version 5.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 3.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
lfa Romeo - 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04
iat - Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11
iat - 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
eugeot - 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
*************************************************************************
oftware version 1.09.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
enault - Siemens TMS374
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (6 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 34/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
enault - Fenix 3 95160
enault - IAW5NR2.C5 95160
enault - Siemens TMS374
oyota Yaris - Denso 93C46
oyota Land Cruiser - 93LC66
iat - IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
eugeot - IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374
eugeot - Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512
aewoo - Siemens TMS374
ia - Siemens TMS374
olonez - Delco HC11F1
over - 214,216 93C46
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dditional features
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
PI programmer (hardware required BB nr1)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 21.08.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
EUGEOT / CITROEN - ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.
EUGEOT - ECU SAGEM S2000 PIN progr.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
pel - DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)
*************************************************************************
oftware version 20.08.05
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
iat - Bosch - 24C02
ercedes - C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. 1/2
ercedes - C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2
pel - DTL - Bosch
eugeot - MP5.1.1 - Bosch
enault - 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli
koda - SIMOS - Siemens
*************************************************************************
oftware version 18.08.05 (first version)
*************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
alculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (7 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 35/376
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt
ITROEN Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC
ITROEN C3 - BSI - MEM 95160
ITROEN Xara - BSI - MEM 95040
ITROEN Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040
EUGEOT / CITROEN - BSI - De/encryption
EUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog.
EUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog.
EUGEOT 206 - BSI - MEM 95160
EUGEOT 206 - BSI - MCU HC912
EUGEOT 307 - BSI - MCU HC912
EUGEOT 307 - BSI - MEM 95160
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
dapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
itroen - IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli
iat - IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli
iat - IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Marelli
ercedes - Start Error - Sprinter
ercedes - Start Error - Vito HC05
ercedes - Start Error - Vito HC08
eugeot - S2000 - Sagem
enault - DCI - Bosch
enault - DCI - Delphi
enault - DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo
enault - DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo
enault - SIRIUS32 - Siemens
enault - SIRIUS34 - Siemens
.A.G. group - TDI - Bosch
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (8 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 36/376
Eurocheck
L a e m p r e s a
Po t e n c i a c i ó n
I n m o v i l i za d o r e s
GNC / G LP
Rep a r a c i o n e s d e ECU
Z óc a l o s I n t e l i g e n t e s
P r e s i ó n Po s i t i v a
Con tác t en os
Zócalos Inteligentes
Al realizar una conversión de unidad de mando para GNC, GLP o alcohol, utilizamos zócalos Bi-Fuel. Este
zócalo, se monta en la ECU a convertir en lugar de la memoria eprom original. Sobre el zócalo, se monta otra
memoria (de doble capacidad respecto a la original) con la información original del vehículo y además, la
nueva información de combustible alternativo. El zócalo Bi-Fuel gestiona la conmutación de los bancos de la
memoria, para que el vehículo tome lectura de la información correspondiente al combustible usado.
Diseñamos y fabricamos todos los modelos de zócalos para todo tipo de vehículo. Utilizamos
materiales de primera calidad, placas testeadas electrónicamente, y un sistema de control de
calidad que nos permite reducir el margen de fallas al mínimo.
Zóca l o B i Fu e l Zóca l o Ju m p . O r i g Zóca l o Ju m p e a d o A l g u n o s Ve h ícu l o s
E-110
(Memoria original)27C256
(Memoria aMontar)27C512
ChevroletCorsa
Vectra Astra
Daewo Espero Nubira
http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (1 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 37/376
Eurocheck
E-120
(Memoria original)27C512
(Memoria aMontar)27C010
27C256 27C512
ChevroletCorsa
Vectra Astra
Daewo Espero Nubira
E-130
(Memoria original)27C512Latch(Memoria a
Montar)27C010
Renault 19 Clio
VW Gol 1000
E-140
E-120 con 27C512 Peugeot 205
E-210
(Memoria original)27C512
(Memoria aMontar)27C010
Twingo
VW Gol VW Polo
E-220
(Memoria original)28F512
(Memoria aMontar)27C010
27C010 27C020
RenaultMegane
VW Gol Chevrolet
Corsa 16V
E-210SE
(Memoria original)27C512
(Memoria aMontar)27C010
Peugeot 306
http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (2 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 38/376
Eurocheck
E-220SE
(Memoria original)28F512
(Memoria aMontar)27C010
27C010 27C020
Peugeot 306
E-310
(Memoria original)29F200
(Memoria aMontar)29F400
29F400 29F800
Peugeot 206 Renault Clio 2
Kangoo
E-311
(Memoria original)29F200
(Memoria aMontar)29F400
29F400 29F800
VW Golf 4
Módulos de Ford
Ford, a diferencia de las demás empresas automotrices, desarrolla sus
propias unidades de mando y sistemas electrónicos. La arquitectura
electrónica de los vehículos Ford, está pensada para facilitar los
trabajos de potenciación e implementación de sistemas Bi-Fuel (GNC,
GLP y alcohol).
Las unidades de mando de éstos vehículos (EEC) disponen de un conector (J3), por donde se accede a los
datos e información de memoria. Contamos con un Lector/Programador Ford con el cual leemos estos datos
para luego modificarlos en función de las necesidades de nuestros clientes (ya sea potenciación o gestión de
combustibles alternativos) y que además, programa nuestros propios módulos. Los módulos programados, ya
sea con la información de potenciación, o bien con la necesaria para gestión de combustibles alternativos, se
conectan en el J3 y el vehículo entiende que desde ese momento en adelante, no tiene que leer más la
memoria eprom original, sino que debe leer la nueva memoria instalada dentro del módulo. Para que el
vehículo vuelva a su estado original, no hay más que desconectar este módulo.
Es posible potenciar y realizar conversiones Bi-Fuel (GNC, GLP,
http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (3 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 39/376
Eurocheck
alcohol) a todo vehículo marca Ford y VW con sistema de inyección
Ford (Mercosur, Autolatina año 1993 a 1996).
Para mas información puede ver Equipos para reprogramaciones.
http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (4 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 40/376
SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE
FIAT IMMO 1.1
88 with 5P08C3 MEMCU - BOSCH with 24C02 memory e.g.CU - DELCO BPKA 2 plugs(beige+red)CU - HITACHI MFI 003BC2
CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 16F.XXCU - Magneti Marelli IAW 18F.B4CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1ABB.92CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1AF.1GCU - Magneti Marelli IAW 49F.B4CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M1CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M7CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M9CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.S2
CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 59F.Mx (Hybrid)CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 5NF.T1CU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.5TCU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.6BCU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.22
Mercedes START-ERROR
http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (1 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 41/376
SOFTWARE
RENAULT IMMO 1.1
CU - 5NR2.C5 M.M. 95160, Delete ImmoCU - DCI BoschCU - DCI DelphiCU - DCU3R Lucas, Clear ImmoCU - DCU3R Lucas, Delete ImmoCU - DTI Bosch ( 1 plug )CU - DTI Bosch ( 2 plugs )CU - FENIX1 BVA Siemens HC11, Delete ImmoCU - FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Clear Immo
http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (2 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 42/376
SOFTWARE
CU - FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Delete ImmoCU - FENIX5 Siemens TMS374CU - IAW 6R.2030 TMS370, Delete ImmoCU - SIRIUS32 Siemens, Clear ImmoCU - SIRIUS32 Siemens, Delete ImmoCU - SIRIUS34 Siemens, Clear ImmoCU - SIRIUS34 Siemens, Delete Immo
LICZNIK
prepočet kilometrov
podporované jednotky TU
MMO KILLER
vypnutie immo v BSI a riadiacích jednotkách
http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (3 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 43/376
SOFTWARE
podporované jednotky TU
http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (4 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 44/376
Tipos de Immo
Immo Tipo “ B “ Immo Tipo “ A “
Las flechas señalan paraambos casos, el circuitodonde se colocaran laspinzas. El punto rojoindicaque es la pata # 1 yla posición del lado blancopintado sobre las pinzas almomento de colocar.Pinza lado blanco.
Componente chicle de color azul.
• Solamente el Immo tipo “A” es necesarioponer en corto con un caimán para poderseleer, estas patas son las dos de la orilla delas tres patas del componente que tieneforma de un chicle de color azul.y que por la parte inferior del Immo son lasúnicas tres que sobresalen,por lo cual es fácil identificarlas
Parte inferior del Immo tipo “ A “
El Vag-Pin cuenta con dos botones al frente, el botón lado izquierdo es el botón de reset y el accesoa leer el código de 4 dígitos del Immo, el botón derecho nos sirve para escoger el tipo de Immo a leersea tipo “ A “ o tipo “ B “ . En caso de colocar mal las pinzas el Vag-Pin mostrara en su pantalla error enpinzas, es importante verificar que las pinzas estén haciendo perfectamente el contacto con las 8 patasdel componente y que no quede ninguna pata de la pinza por encima del componente, y una vez quesea leído, verificar dos veces mas que te de el mismo numero de Immo, eso para descartar la posibilidadde haber inducido ruido al momento de colocar las pinzas. El Vag-Pin se alimenta del conector dediagnostico de cualquier auto con conector tipo OBD2, y se enciende desde el momento que se conecta.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 45/376
Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic
List of vehicles covered from function odometer change via OBDII:
Audi Q7 (CAN)
Audi A2 (K)
Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K)
Audi A4 VDO/M73 (K)
Audi A4 BOSCH - RB4 clusters (CRYPTO eeproms R/W by OBDII)
Audi A6 VDO (K)
Audi A6 (CAN)
Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004
Audi A8 (K) VDO93xx
Audi A8 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi TT (K)
Seat Alhambra (K) Seat Altea (CAN)
Seat Arosa (K)
Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K)
Seat Ibiza VDO after 1999 (K)
Seat Leon (K+CAN)
Seat Toledo (K+CAN)
Skoda Octavia (K)
Skoda Octavia II (CAN)
Skoda Superb (K) Skoda Roomster (K)
Skoda Scout (CAN)
Skoda Fabia (K)
VW Bora (K)
VW Beetle (K)
VW Caddy (CAN)
VW EOS (CAN)
VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB
VW Golf5 VDO (CAN) VW Golf5 VISETEON
VW Crossgolf (CAN)
VW Individual (CAN)
VW Jetta (K+CAN)
VW Passat B5/B6 (K+CAN)
VW Polo VDO/Motometer (K)
VW Sharan (K)
VW T4/T5 VDO (K)
VW Touaran VDO (CAN) VW Touaraeg
VW Phaeton
Bentley Continental
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 46/376
Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic
Porsche Cayenne
List of vehicles covered from function security access code/login reading via OBDII:
Audi A2
Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K)
Audi A4 VDO (K)
Audi A4 BOSCH (K) up to 2001
Audi A4 after 2000 - petrol engines >= 1.8
Audi A6 VDO (K)
Audi A6 (CAN) petrol engines
Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004
Audi Allroad (CAN) petrol engines
Audi A8 up to 2001
Audi A8 from 2001 to 2002 2.5TDI Audi A8 (CAN) 2003+ petrol
Audi TT (K)
Audi Q7 petrol engines
Seat Altea (CAN)
Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K)
Seat Ibiza (VDO) after 1999 (K)
Seat Leon (K+CAN)
Seat Toledo (K+CAN)
Skoda Octavia Skoda Octavia II (CAN)
Skoda Superb
Skoda Roomster
Skoda Scout (CAN)
Skoda Fabia
VW Bora
VW Beetle
VW Caddy (CAN)
VW EOS (CAN) VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB
VW Golf5 VDO (CAN)
VW Crossgolf (CAN)
VW Individual (CAN)
VW Jetta (K+CAN)
VW Passat B5 (K) B6(CAN)
VW Polo5
VW Sharan after year 2000
VW T5 VW Phaeton petrol
VW Touareg petrol
VW Touaran VDO (CAN)
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 47/376
Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic
PORSCHE Cayenne (CAN/K)
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 48/376
1
1.1 Introduction
The ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter designed for easy access to
Motorola M68HC11/M68HC05 families of microcontrollers. The ETSMART MICRO
programming adapter lets you program unsecured members of the
M68HC11/MC68HC05 MCU families via serial boot strap mode.
1.2 ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter hardware
The main features of the MICRO programming adapter are shown in the
following figure:
Figure 1
© ETL 2005-2007 Microcontroller Tools
Target IC ISP header
To target IC connectorETMARTUSB header
To ETSMARTUSB
programmer connector
Activity LEDControl LEDPIN 1 PIN 1
Master MCU
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 49/376
2
1.3 Device programming example
Explore OPEL SC303 car radio; target MCU – MC 68HC11E9
Figure 2
Select Device
Figure 3
Select Crystal Frequency
Figure 4
The default value is 4000kHz (4Mhz). Set the frequency value according to the
crystal value (see Figure 8). Connect the MICRO programming adapter to the
target hardware then connect the explored car radio to the power supply
source (see Figure 7). Attach MICRO programming adapter to ETSMARTUSB via
flexible pin-to-pin cable then attach target device to 10-pins programming
adapter header J 2 (see Figures 5, 6, 7, 8).
© ETL 2005-2007 Microcontroller Tools
8000
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 50/376
3
1 - TxD;2 - RxD;3 - out1;4 - out2;5- VCC;6 - VCC;7 -GND;8 - GND;9, 10 - + 10 V;
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
J1 J1 J2
J2
Figure 5
43Kohm Figure 6
© ETL 2005-2007 Microcontroller Tools
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 51/376
4
Figure 7
Figure 8
The Figure 8 displayed connection between target equipment and MICRO
programming adapter. ETL strongly recommend use the laboratory power
supply source with current protection feature. A car battery is a bad
© ETL 2005-2007 Microcontroller Tools
8000 kHz crystal
Pin№7 – EXTALPin№8 – XTAL
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 52/376
5
alternative to the laboratory power supply source during research and tests.
1.4 MICRO programming adapter schematic capture
Figure 9
© ETL 2005-2007 Microcontroller Tools
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 53/376
User's Manual for
BeeHive4Fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system
ELNEC s.r.o.Presov, SlovakiaSeptember 2005
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 54/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 - 2005ELNEC s.r.o.
This document is copyrighted by ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. All rights reserved.This document or any part of it may not be copied, reproduced or translated in any formor in any way without the prior written permission of ELNEC s.r.o.
The control program is copyright ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. The control programor any part of it may not be analyzed, disassembled or modified in any form, on anymedium, for any purpose.
Information provided in this manual is intended to be accurate at the moment of release,but we continuously improve all our products. Please consult manual onwww.elnec.com.
ELNEC s.r.o. assumes no responsibility for misuse of this manual.
ELNEC s.r.o. reserves the right to make changes or improvements to the productdescribed in this manual at any time without notice. This manual contains names ofcompanies, software products, etc., which may be trademarks of their respectiveowners. ELNEC s.r.o. respects those trademarks.
ZLI-0297A
2
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 55/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 56/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
IntroductionBeeHive4 is fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system designed for high volume production programming with minimal operator effort. Thechips are programmed at near theoretical maximum programming speed.
BeeHive4 supports all kinds of types and silicon technologies of today and tomorrowprogrammable devices without family-specific module. You can be sure the nextdevices support require the software update and (if necessary) simple packageconverter (programming adapter), therefore the ownership cost are minimized.
BeeHive4 provides very competitive price coupled with excellent hardware design forreliable programming. It has probably best "value for money" programmer in this class.
BeeHive4 consists of four independent isolated universal programming modules, basedon the BeeProg programmer hardware. Therefore the sockets can run asynchronously(concurrent programming mode). Each programming module starts programming assoon as the new chip is correctly inserted to the ZIF of programming module. It resultthree programming modules works while you replace the programmed chip at thefourth. The operator merely removes the finished chip and inserts a new chip. Operatortraining is therefore minimized.
Modular construction of hardware - the programming modules works independently -allows for continuing operation when a part of the circuit becomes inoperable. It alsomakes service quick and easy.
BeeHive4 interfaces with the IBM PC/compatible, portable or desktop personalcomputers through USB (2.0) port.
BeeHive4 provides very fast programming due to high-speed FPGA driven hardwareand execution of time-critical routines inside of the programmer. FPGA based totallyreconfigurable 48 powerful TTL pindrivers provide H/L/pull_up/pull_down and readcapability for each pin of socket. Advanced pindrivers incorporate high-quality high-
speed circuitry to deliver signals without overshoot or ground bounce for all supporteddevices. Pin drivers operate down to 1.8V so you'll be ready to program the full range oftoday's advanced low-voltage devices.
BeeHive4 performs on each programming module device insertion test (wrong orbackward position) and contact check (poor contact pin-to-socket) before it programseach device. These capabilities, supported by overcurrent protection and signature-bytecheck help prevent chip damage due to operator error.
BeeHive4 has a built-in protection circuits for eliminate damage of programmer and/orprogrammed device due to environment or operator failure. All ZIF socket pins of
BeeHive4 programmer are protected against ESD up to 15kV.
4
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 57/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
BeeHive4 has the selftest capability, which allows run diagnostic part of software tothoroughly check the health of the each programming module.
BeeHive4 performs programming verification at the marginal level of supply voltage,
which, obviously, improves programming yield, and guarantees long data retention.
BeeHive4 provides a banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection to easy-to-implementthe ESD protection control.
Various socket converters are available to handle device in PLCC, SOIC, PSOP,SSOP, TSOP, TSSOP, TQFP, QFN (MLF), SDIP, BGA and other packages.
It is important to remember that in most cases new devices require only a softwareupdate due to the BeeHive4 is truly universal programmer. With our prompt service youcan have new devices can be added to the current list within hours! See AlgOR(Algorithm On Request) service for details at www.elnec.com.
Advanced design including protection circuits, original brand components and carefulmanufacturing allows us to provide a three-year warranty on parts and labour for theBeeHive4 (limited 25,000-cycle warranty on ZIF sockets). This warranty terms are validfor customers, who purchase a programmer directly from Elnec company. The warrantyconditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on the target country law system orElnec seller’s warranty policy.
Free addit ional services:
• free lifetime software update via Web site.
Free sof tware updates are available from ourInternet address www.elnec.com.
• Online technical support is available within promised 24 hours time limit or you maycall us during business hours from Monday through Friday 8:30 to 17:30 (CET).
• Keep-Current is a service by which ELNEC ships to you the latest version of thecontrol program for programmer and the updated user documentation. A Keep-Current service is your hassle-free guarantee that you always have access to thelatest software and documentation, at minimal cost.
• AlgOR (Algorithm On Request) service allows you to receive from ELNEC softwaresupport for programming devices not yet available in the current device list.
5
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 58/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
BeeHive4 elements
48 pin ZIF socket LED indicators for work result LED indicator power Banana jack for connecting ESD wrist strap
Type B USB connector for PC ↔ BeeHive4 communication cable Power switch Power supply connector
Manipulation with the programmed device
After selection of desired device for your work, you can insert into the open ZIF socket(the lever is up) and close socket (the lever is down). The correct orientation of the
programmed device in ZIF socket is shown on the picture near ZIF socket on the
6
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 59/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
programmer's cover. The programmed device is necessary to insert into the socket alsoto remove from the socket when LED BUSY is off.
Note: Programmer's protection electronics protect the target device and the
programmer itself against either short or long-term power failures and, partly, alsoagainst a PC failure. However, it is not possible to grant the integrity of the target devicedue to incorrect, user-selected programming parameters. Target device may be notdestroyed by forced interruption of the control program (reset or switch-off PC), byremoving the physical connection to the programmer, but the content of actuallyprogrammed cell may remains undefined. Don't unplug the target device from the ZIFsocket during work with device (LED BUSY shine).
Selftest and calibration
If you feel that your programmer does not react according to your expectation, please
run the programmer selftest using Diagnostic POD, enclosed with the standard deliverypackage. For optimal results with programmer we also recommend you to performextended test by the calibration test procedure every 6 months at least. See instructionsfor selftest in the Programmer menu.
Technical specification
SPECIFICATION (valid for each programming module)
HARDWARE
Base unit, DACs
• USB 2.0 port
• on-board intelligence: powerful microprocessor and FPGA based state machine
• three D/A converters for VCCP, VPP1, and VPP2, controllable rise and fall time
• VCCP range 0..8V/1A
• VPP1, VPP2 range 0..26V/1A
• autocalibration
• selftest capability
• protection against surge and ESD on power supply input, parallel port connection
7
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 60/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Socket, pindriver
• 48-pin DIL ZIF (Zero Insertion Force) socket accepts both 300/600 mil devices up to48-pin
• pindrivers: 48 universal
• VCCP / VPP1 / VPP2 can be connected to each pin
• perfect ground for each pin
• FPGA based TTL driver provides H, L, CLK, pull-up, pull-down on all pindriver pins
• analog pindriver output level selectable from 1.8 V up to 26V
• current limitation, overcurrent shutdown, power failure shutdown
• ESD protection on each pin of socket (IEC1000-4-2: 15kV air, 8kV contact)
• continuity test: each pin is tested before every programming operation
DEVICE SUPPORT (valid for each programming module)
Programmer• EPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 2708, 27xxx and 27Cxxx series, with 8/16 bit data width, full
support for LV series
• EEPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 28xxx, 28Cxxx, 27EExxx series, with 8/16 bit data width
• Flash EPROM: 28Fxxx, 29Cxxx, 29Fxxx, 29BVxxx, 29LVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx series,from 256Kbit to 32Mbit, with 8/16 bit data width, full support for LV series
• Serial E(E)PROM: 24Cxxx, 24Fxxx, 25Cxxx, 45Dxxx, 59Cxxx, 25Fxxx, 25Pxxx, 85xxx,93Cxxx, NVM3060, MDAxxx series, full support for LV series
• Configuration (EE)PROM: XCFxxx, XC17xxxx, XC18Vxxx, EPCxxx, AT17xxx, 37LVxx
• 1-Wire E(E)PROM: DS1xxx, DS2xxx
• PROM: AMD, Harris, National, Philips/Signetics, Tesla, TI
• NV RAM: Dallas DSxxx, SGS/Inmos MKxxx, SIMTEK STKxxx, XICOR 2xxx, ZMDU63x series
• PLD: Altera: MAX 3000A, MAX 7000A, MAX 7000B, MAX 7000S, MAX7000AE
• PLD: Lattice: ispGAL22V10x, ispLSI1xxx, ispLSI1xxxEA, ispLSI2xxx, ispLSI2xxxA,ispLSI2xxxE, ispLSI2xxxV, ispLSI2xxxVE, ispLSI2xxxVL, LC4xxxB/C/V/ZC, M4-xx/xx,M4A3-xx/xx, M4A5-xx/xx, M4LV-xx/xx
• PLD: Xilinx: XC9500, XC9500XL, XC9500XV, CoolRunner XPLA3, CoolRunner-II
• other PLD: SPLD/CPLD series: AMI, Atmel, AMD-Vantis, Gould, Cypress, ICT, Lattice,NS, Philips, STM, VLSI, TI
• Microcontrollers 48 series: 87x41, 87x42, 87x48, 87x49, 87x50 series
• Microcontrollers 51 series: 87xx, 87Cxxx, 87LVxx, 89Cxxx, 89Sxxx, 89LVxxx, allmanufacturers, Philips LPC series
• Microcontrollers Intel 196 series: 87C196 KB/KC/KD/KT/KR/...
• Microcontrollers Atmel AVR: AT90Sxxxx, ATtiny, ATmega series
• Microcontrollers Cypress: CY8Cxxxxx
• Microcontrollers ELAN: EM78Pxxx
• Microcontrollers MDT 1xxx and 2xxx series
• Microcontrollers Microchip PICmicro: PIC10xxx, PIC12xxx, PIC16xxx, PIC17Cxxx,PIC18xxx, dsPIC series
• Microcontrollers Motorola (Freescale): 68HC05, 68HC08, 68HC11 series
• Microcontrollers Myson MTV2xx, 3xx, 4xx and 5xx series
•
Microcontrollers National: COP8xxx series• Microcontrollers NEC: uPD78xxx series
8
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 61/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
• Microcontrollers Scenix (Ubicom): SXxxx series
• Microcontrollers SGS-Thomson: ST6xx, ST7xx, ST10xx series
• Microcontrollers TI: MSP430 and MSC121x series
• Microcontrollers ZILOG: Z86/Z89xxx and Z8xxx series
• Microcontrollers other: EM Microelectronic, Fujitsu, Goal Semiconductor, Hitachi,Holtek, Princeton, Macronix, Winbond, Infineon(Siemens), NEC, Samsung, Toshiba, ...
Notes:
• For all supported devices see actual Device list on www.elnec.com
Package support
• support all devices in DIP with default socket
• package support includes DIP, SDIP, PLCC, JLCC, SOIC, SOP, PSOP, SSOP,TSOP, TSOPII, TSSOP, QFP, PQFP, TQFP, VQFP, QFN (MLF), SON, BGA, EBGA,FBGA, VFBGA, UBGA, CSP, SCSP etc.
• support devices in non-DIP packages up to 48 pins with universal adapters
• programmer is compatible with third-party adapters for non-DIP support
Programming speed
Notes:
• It is important to know, we always use random numbers pattern for programmingspeed testing. Some our competitors use "sparse" pattern, where only few non-Blank data are programmed or are there are used data with only few 0 bits (FE, EF,etc.). This cheating approach can "decrease" programming time considerable. If youplan to compare, ask always which pattern they use.
• The programming speed depends on PC speed only slightly.
Device Size [bit s] Operation Time B
M50FW080 (parallel Flash) 100000Hx8 (8 Mega) programming and verify 32 sec
AM29DL323DB (parallel Flash) 208000Hx16 (32 Mega) programming and verify 38 sec
AM29DL640 (parallel Flash) 400080Hx16 (64 Mega) programming and verify 76 sec
AT45D081 (serial Flash) 108000Hx8 (16 Mega) programming and verify 43 sec
AT89C51RD2 (microcontroller) 10000Hx8 programming and verify 15 sec
PIC18F452 (microcontroller) 4000Hx16 programming and verify 4 sec
Conditions: P4, 2,4GHz, USB 2.0, Windows XP, 2.18 version of SW
SOFTWARE
• Algori thms: only manufacturer approved or certified algorithms are used. Customalgorithms are available at additional cost.
• Algori thm updates: software updates are available approx. every 2 weeks, free ofcharge.
• Main features: revision history, session logging, on-line help, device and algorithminformation
Device operations
• engineering mode
• standard:
• intelligent device selection by device type, manufacturer or typed fragment of partname
9
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 62/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
• automatic ID-based selection of EPROM/Flash EPROM
• blank check, read, verify
• program
• erase
• configuration and security bit program• illegal bit test
• checksum
• security
• insertion test, reverse insertion check
• contact check
• ID byte check
• special
• production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion)
• auto device serial number increment
• statistic
• count-down mode• production mode All operations are controlled by project file.
• standard:
• blank check, read, verify
• program
• erase
• configuration and security bit program
• illegal bit test
• checksum
• security
• insertion test, reverse insertion check
• contact check
• ID byte check
• special
• production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion)
• auto device serial number increment
• statistic
• count-down mode
Buffer operations
Only for engineering mode.• view/edit, find/replace
• fill/copy, move, byte swap, word/dword split
• checksum (byte, word)
Supported file formats
• unformatted (raw) binary
• HEX: Intel, Intel EXT, Motorola S-record, MOS, Exormax, Tektronix, ASCII-space-HEX
• Altera POF, JEDEC (ver. 3.0.A), e.g. from ABEL, CUPL, PALASM, TANGO PLD,OrCAD PLD, PLD Designer ISDATA, etc.
10
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 63/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
SPECIFICATION (BeeHive4 mult iprogramming system)
• 4x universal programming module (4x 48-pin DIL ZIF sockets)
• operation result LEDs, LED power
• USB 2.0 port
• Line power input 100-240VAC/60W max.
• banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection
PC system requirements
• Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/2003/XP64 (XP and above recommended)
• PC Pentium 4; 1.3 GHz (2GHz and above recommended)
• 256 MB of RAM (512MB and above recommended)
• 50 MB of free disk space (*1)
• USB port 2.0 (2.0 high-speed recommended)
Note (*1): Free disk space requirement depends also on used IC device size. For largedevices the required free space on disk will be approximately 60MB + Device size
GENERAL
• operating voltage AC 100-240V, max.1.2A, 50-60Hz
• power consumption max. 60W active
• dimensions 506x213x86 mm (19.9x8.4x3.4 inch)
• weight (programmer) 4.8kg (10.58 lbs)
• temperature 5°C ÷ 40°C (41°F ÷ 104°F)
• humidity 20%..80%, non condensing
Package included
Standard accessor ies
• BeeHive4 programmer
• USB connection cable PC-programmer
• diagnostic POD for selftest of the programmer (1x)
• anti-dust cover for ZIF socket (4x)
• user manual
• software CD
• registration card
•
calibration test report• transport caseBonus pack:
• ESD wrist strap with cord and banana plug
• Vacuum pen
• Gift (surprise)
Additional services
• Keep Current.
• AlgOR
• free technical support (phone/fax/e-mail).
• free lifetime software update via Web site.
11
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 64/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
SetupThe programmer package contains a CD with the control program, useful utilities andadditional information. The permission to freely copy the content of the CD is granted inorder to demonstrate how ELNEC's programmers work.
We recommended install software before connecting programmer to PC to avoidunwanted complication during installation.
Software setup
Insert delivered CD to your CD drive and install program starts automatically (if not, runsetup.exe). Install program will guide you through the installation process and will do allthe necessary steps before you can first run the control program.Step 1.
Click on “Software installation PROGRAMMERS” button.Step 2.
Select language and than click on “OK” button.
12
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 65/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 3.
Click on “Next” buttonStep 4.
For change default folder click on “Browse” button, select the destination folder.
Then click on “Next” button
13
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 66/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 5.
For change default folder click on “Browse” button, select the destination folder.Then click on “Next” button
Step 6.
Check if “Install Multiprogramming control support” is selected. Change defaultsetting, if you want. Then click on “Next” button
14
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 67/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 7.
Check your setting and then click on “Install” buttonStep 8.
Installation process will start.
15
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 68/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 8.
Click “Finish” button to finish setup.
New versions of programmer software
In order to exploit all the capabilities of programmer we recommend using the latestversion of PG4UW. You may download the latest version of programmer software (filePG4UWARC.exe) from our Internet site www.elnec.com, part download.
Copy PG4UWARC.exe to a temporary directory, disconnect BeeHive4 from PC andthen launch it. Setup will start with Step 2 from previous chapter.
Hardware setup
Step 1.
Directly connect USB cable to type B USB port on programmer.Step 2.Directly connect USB cable to type A USB2.0 port on PC (high-speed recommended).Step 3.Connect connectors of power supply cable to appropriate connectors on programmerand wall plug.Step 4.Turn on programmer. At this time all 'work result' LEDs light up successive and thenLEDs switch off.
16
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 69/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 5.Windows will start with “Found new hardware wizard”.
For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 users only:
Select “No, not this time” and then click on “Next” button.
For all:
Select “Install the software automatically” and then click on “Next” button.
17
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 70/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 6.
Click on “Continue Anyway” button.Step 7.
Click “Finish” button to finish setup.Step 8.“Found new hardware wizard” will launch for each programming module. Hardwaresetup will be continued with Step 5.Note: If a different USB port on the PC is used for the next connection of BeeHive4,
“Found new hardware wizard” will launch and install new USB drivers.
18
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 71/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Programming a deviceBeeHive4 can operate in two modes:
Engineering mode for make a project Production mode for mass production
Engineering mode
This part of the software is focused to the quick and easy preparation of the project filefor usage in the production mode control software.
Each programming module is driven by an easy-to-use control program with pull-downmenu, hot keys and on-line help. Selecting of device is performed by its class, bymanufacturer or simply by typing a fragment of vendor name and/or part number. It isthe same years-proven software, as is used for all other Elnec single-site programmers.Engineer can use all properties of this software and can make a project for massproduction.
Standard device-related commands (read, blank check, program, verify, erase) areboosted by some test functions (insertion test, connection check, signature-byte check),and some special functions (autoincrement, production mode - start immediately afterinsertion of chip into socket).
All known data formats are supported. Automatic file format detection and conversionare doing during loading of file. There is possible to use Jam files (JEDEC standardJESD-71) and VME files
The rich-featured auto-increment function enables one to assign individual serialnumbers to each programmed device - or simply increments a serial number, or thefunction enables one to read serial numbers or any programmed device identificationsignatures from a file.
The software also provides a many informations about programmed device. As aspecial, the drawing of all available packages is provided. The software provides alsoexplanation of chip labeling (the meaning of prefixes and suffixes at the chips) for eachsupported chip.
19
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 72/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Make a project
1. Connect programmer to PC and outlet. Turn programmer on.
2. Run the control program: double click on3. Find BeeHive4 Site (programmer): <Ctrl+F> or right click on panel Programmer
20
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 73/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
In combo box “Programmer” select BeeHive4, Site and then click on “OK” button.
4. Select site.
Select desired BeeHive4 Site# and then click on “OK” button
5. Select device: click on
6. Load data into buffer from file: click on7. Set Device operation options
21
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 74/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 75/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
9. Save project: click on and select destination folder, write a description ofproject etc.
For more details see Help for PG4UW or “User manual for all ELNEC programmers”.Latest manual you may find it on www.elnec.com part download.
Production mode
This part of the software is focused to the easy monitoring of high-volume productionoperations.
Operator-friendly control software (Pg4uwMC) combines many powerful functions withease of use. Graphic user interface provide overview of all important activities resultwithout burden of operator with non-important details.
There is used a project file to control the BeeHive4 multiprogramming system. Projectfile contains user data, chip programming setup information, chip configuration data,auto programming command sequence, etc. Therefore the operator error isminimized, because the project file is normally created and proofed by engineering andthen given to the operator. The optional protected mode can be set for project file toavoid unwanted changes of the project file.
Each chip may be programmed with different data such as serial number ,configuration and calibration information.
23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 76/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 77/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
7. For end of work with desired device: click on “Stop ALL” button.8. If you want continue with a new project go to step 4.9. For end of work with BeeHive4 click on “Disconnect programmers” button
and then terminate a program: - <Alt+F4> or File / Exit.
Menu Programmer / Programmer Sites (or by right click on panel “Site #”) allows theuser to show or to hide Site window, refind a programmer site, disconnect site or runselftest (Selftest plus) procedure for selected site.
Menu Options / Settings allows the user to verify or to change some setting of controlprogram.
25
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 78/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
On upper part of window is a table with some site properties: allowed or prohibit site,Serial number, project file for site and programmed device.If you check “Site #”, then desired site is allowed. If uncheck, then site is disabled.If you check “Use Site #1 project for all Sites”, then project from Site #1 is the same
for all sites. If uncheck, then all sites can have different project files.If you check “ Automat ic YES!”, then automatic start of action with device after insertiondevice to ZIF is allowed.
Timer refresh rate defines how often the Pg4uwMC program will request statusinformation displayed in Status window panel from running PG4UW programs.
For more details see Help for Pg4uwMC software.
26
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 79/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
Troubleshooting and warranty
Troubleshooting
We really want you to enjoy our product. Nevertheless, problems can occur. In suchcases please follow the instructions below.
• It might be your mistake in properly operating the programmer or its control programPG4UW.
• Please read carefully all the enclosed documentation again. Probably you will findthe needed answer right away.
• Try to install programmer and PG4UW on another computer. If your system worksnormally on the other computer you might have a problem with the first one PC.Compare differences between both computers.
• Ask your in-house guru (every office has one!).• Ask the person who already installed programmer.
• If the problem persists, please call the local dealer, from whom you purchased theprogrammer, or call ELNEC direct. Most problems can be solved by phone, e-mailor fax. If you want to contact us by:
• Mail/fax - Copy the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following theinstructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider beingrelevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send thecompleted form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program,menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax pleaseuse black ink, a good pen and large letters!
• E-mail - Use "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form on the CD or from our Internetsite and fill it in following the instructions at the end of the form. Use standard
ASCII editor. Write everything down that you consider being relevant about theprogrammer, software and the target device. Send the completed form by e-mailto your local dealer or to ELNEC ((nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com).
• Phone - Copy "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following theinstructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider beingrelevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send thecompleted form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program,menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax pleaseuse black ink, a good pen and large letters easily to read. Then call your localdealer or ELNEC's customer support center (phone number in the controlprogram, menu Help / About). Please keep your manual, the programmer andthe completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form (just faxed) available, so thatyou can respond quickly to our questions.
• If your programmer is diagnosed as defective, consult your local dealer or ELNECabout the pertinent repair center in your country. Please carefully include the
following items in the package:• defective product
27
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 80/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
• completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form• photocopy of a dated proof of purchase
Without all these items we cannot admit your
programmer to repair.
Note:You may find the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form at our Internet site(www.elnec.com), section 'Support'.
If you have an unsupported target device
If you need to operate on a target device not supported by the control program forprogrammer, please do not despair and follow the next steps:
• Look in the device list of the latest version of the control program on our Internet site(section Download, file corresponded to your programmer). Your new target devicemight already be included in this version! If yes, download the file PG4UWARC.exeand install the new version of the control program.
• Contact ELNEC direct, filling up a "Device Problem Report" form following theinstructions at the end of this form. We may need detailed data sheets of your targetdevice and, if possible, samples. The samples will be returned to you after weinclude your target device in a new version of PG4UW.
Note:See also AlgOR service at our Internet site (www.elnec.com), section 'Support'
Warranty terms
The manufacturer, ELNEC s.r.o. Presov, Slovakia, gives a guarantee on failure-freeoperating of the programmer and all its parts, materials and workmanship for three-yearfrom the date of purchase. This warranty is limited to 25,000-cycles on DIL ZIF socketor 10,000-cycles on other ZIF sockets). If the product is diagnosed as defective, ELNECs.r.o. or the authorized repair center will repair or replace defective parts at no charge.Parts used for replacement and/or whole programmer are warranted only for thereminder of the original warranty period.
For repair within the warranty period, the customer must prove the date of purchase.
This warranty terms are valid for customers, who purchase a programmer directly fromElnec company. The warranty conditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on thetarget country law system or Elnec seller’s warranty policy.
The warranty does not apply to products that are of wear and tear or mechanicallydamaged. Equally, the warranty does not apply to products opened and/or repairedand/or altered by personnel not authorized by ELNEC, or to products that have been
misused, abused, accidentated or that were improperly installed.
28
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 81/376
ELNEC s.r.o.
For unwarrantable repairs you will be billed according to the costs of replacementmaterials, service time and freight. ELNEC or its distributors will determine whether thedefective product should be repaired or replaced and judge whether or not the warrantyapplies.
Manufacturer:: ELNEC s. r. o., Post 5, P. O. Box 22, SK - 08005 Presov, Slovakia: +42151/77 34 328, 77 31 007, fax 77 32 797www.elnec.com, (nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com
29
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 82/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 83/376
Vista trasera del programador:
Detalle:
1 Conector de fuente ( 12v)
2 Conector a PC ( salida Serial RS232 PUERTO COM )
3 Salida a Pinza ( CONECTOR )
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 84/376
Programas necesarios para el Funcionamiento del Programador:
IC-PROG Y PONY PROGRAM
Ambos se encuentran al inicio del CD
Para instalar el PONY program, presione el primer botón( Pony prog Beta ) y una vez instalado presione el segundo
Boton ( Pony prog Spanish ) para cambiar el idioma al Español.
El IC-prog es un programa que no necesita instalación, es ejecutableDel CD, o puede copiarlo a su disco rígido ( ICPROG.EXE )
En el botón de Carpetas Varias encontrara toda la informaciónCorrespondiente al uso del programador ( fotos / dumps / etc )
El ultimo botón contiene nuestra dirección de E-MAIL para
Soporte Técnico.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 85/376
FUNCIONAMIENTO:
1 Conecte la fuente ( 220v ) al programador y el LED de POWERSe encenderá.
2 Al mismo tiempo que el led POWER se encienda también seEncenderá el LED de la Primera memoria: 24xxPara pasar a otro tipo de memoria se debe presionar el pulsador
(rojo) SELECT.
3 Una vez seleccionada la memoria se selecciona el tipo de memoriaEn el software y se procede a la lectura o escritura
4 Si la pinza estuviera mal colocada o mal seleccionada la luz deCORTO (amarilla) se encenderá, Verifique la conexión y selecciónDe la eeprom.
5 Durante la Lectura / Escritura el led PROGRAMING ( verde )Se encenderá mientras dure la misma.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 86/376
SOFTWARE: IC-PROG – PONY Prog.SETUP
Este programador es compatible con cualquier software deprogramación que permita la utilización de programadorescon conexión a puerto de serie.A continuación se detalla la configuración de los software de
programación: IC-prog y Pony Program.
IC-PROG:
Una vez abierto el programa, ir a Settings / ajustes, elegirOptions / opciones y seleccionar Language para pasar al
Idioma español.Luego seleccionar otra vez ajustes, hacer clic sobre:
Tipo hardware F3 y aparecera la siguiente ventana:
Esta imagen corresponde a la configuración para WINDOWS XP, Encaso de usar otra version de Windows la configuración puede variar.
NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar según la configuración de cada PC
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 87/376
PONY-PROGRAM:Una vez instalado el programa principal:
Se debe seleccionar: CONFIGURACION y Configuración deINTERFAZ y se abrira la siguiente pantalla:
Esta imagen corresponde a la configuración para WINDOWS XP, Encaso de usar otra version de Windows la configuración puede variar.NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar según la configuración de cada PC
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 88/376
Luego de setear el programa se debe calibrar el programa con elProgramador, para realizar esto se debe igresar otra vez en:
CONFIGURACION y presionar CALIBRACION.
Una vez realizadas estas operaciones, el Programador esta listo paraTrabajar.
NOTA: la puesta a punto ( setup ) de los programas se realizan solouna vez.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 89/376
TOPWIN
Universal Programmer
User Manual
2004.10.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 90/376
- 1 -
Content
Brief Introduction ............................................................................................ 3
Chapter I Software Installation ....................... ....................... ....................... 4
1.1 Software Installation ...................... ....................... ....................... .. 4
1.2 Hardware Connection ..................... ....................... ...................... .. 5
1.3 Software Specification ....................... ....................... ..................... 6
1.4 Main Window ..................... ....................... ........................ ............ 7
Chapter II File Operation ....................... ....................... ....................... ......... 9
2.1 File Menu .................... ....................... ...................... ..................... 9
2.1.1 Create New File ..................... ....................... ..................... 9
2.1.2 Loading ...................... ....................... ....................... ......... 9
2.1.3 the Saving Buffer Zone .................... ........................ ....... 12
2.1.4 Print ..................... ....................... ....................... .............. 12
2.1.5 Set up Printer ..................... ........................ ...................... 13
2.2 Modify Menu: ..................... ........................ ....................... .......... 13
2.2.1 Fill Buffer .................... ....................... ...................... ....... 13
2.2.2 Find: ....................... ........................ ....................... .......... 14
2.2.3 Replace Characters: ........................ ....................... .......... 15
2.2.4 Repeat Last Find (F3): ....................... ....................... ....... 16
2.2.5 Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone: ...................... 16
Chapter III Device Operation .................... ....................... ....................... ... 18
3.1 Conventional Procedures .................... ....................... .................. 18
3.2 Operate Menu ..................... ....................... ........................ .......... 18
3.2.1 Select Type ......................................................................... 18
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 91/376
- 2 -
3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device ........................ ................... 20
Chapter IV SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test ....................... .... 29
4.1 SRAM Test ...................... ....................... ....................... .............. 29
4.2 Integrated Circuit ..................... ....................... ...................... ....... 31
Chapter V System Settings .................... ....................... ....................... ....... 32
5.1 Set Menu ...................... ....................... ....................... ................. 32
5.1.1 System Status ..................... ....................... ...................... 32
5.1.2 Set Additional Information ........................ ...................... 33
5.2 Window Menu ..................... ....................... ...................... ........... 37
5.2.1 Tile ....................... ...................... ....................... .............. 37
5.2.2 Overlap .................... ...................... ....................... ........... 37
5.2.3 All Displays ..................... ...................... ....................... ... 38
5.2.4 Display buffer Window ..................... ....................... ....... 38
Appendix: Hardware Characteristics ...................... ....................... ....... 38
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 92/376
- 3 -
Brief Introduction
TopWin, a type of software developed for TOP series programmers, adapts
to the TOP hardware products of a new generation. TopWin has abandoned
its method of one type of software matching for one mode of TOP product
by operating different mode of hardware units. TopWin supports automatic
identification of hardware mode and function. Once TopWin connects to
hardware unit successfully, the name of hardware unit will appear at the
bottom of window. The current basic modes that TopWin supported
include TOP853, TOP2004, TOP2005 and TOP2048. Product of new mode
developed in the future will be supported by new version of TopWin
software.
TopWin supports multi-window operation, namely, it can connect multiple
programmers on a computer to write device without any interference.
Mode of programmer can be same or different. TopWin opens all devices in
order of alignment. In theory, the number of connected devices is out of
limitation.
TopWin supports Windows98se/Me/2000/XP.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 93/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 94/376
- 5 -
Press OK to exit.
6. To operate TopWin again, green light on programmer turns on,
lower right of software window shows equipment name topxxx,
it shows everything is in normal status and can have normal
operation. Please find the following:
1.2 Hardware Connection
1. USB interface should support hot swap, it can operate computer
first and then reconnect programmer.
2. To connect flat head of cord to USB interface of computer, square
head connect to programmer socket. (Both sides of cords are
different and must have separation.) When power indicator turns
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 95/376
- 6 -
on “POWER” (red), it means power supply of machine has been
put through.
3. To operate on TopWin program, after two to ten seconds,
programmer working indicator" READY" (Green) turns on,
bottom of window shows the name of hardware unit topxxxx. It
shows that machine had ready and can have normal operations.
4. To open set up \ system status in the main menu and press “testing
USB load current”, it show that from grade five to grade ten is
normal, the higher the grade, the stronger the driving force.
Electric current of grade five can write most of devices, some
specific high-current devices need the electric current above grade
seven. Most of the computers can reach to grade seven or more. If
the computer is below grade five, it can connect cord (it should
buy it additionally) or to circumscribe 5V / 2A regulated power
supply (specific model have accessories, please check hardware
specification).
1.3 Software Specification
TopWin don’t support old models of TOP851 / 852 / 2000 / 2003 /
48.
It is possible that D version XP of early age can not operate.
In normal conditions, it can see following information in “my
computer/control panel/system/device manager”:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 96/376
- 7 -
After connect programmer (Jungo/Top programmer/ WinDriver):
If no programmer find,show as:
1.4 Main Window
After TOPWin start-up, main window of TOPWin will be showed on
the screen as follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 97/376
- 8 -
Software interface is composed by menu bar, toolbar, buffer zone, status
bar and report group, therein five menus include all functions and options of
TOPWin operation, set up common icon button in toolbar, it has the
completely same effect to the operation which use in the menu. To use the
methods of click can make command transfer more convenient and rapid.
It should conduct explanation with the main thread of menu function for
software application methods.
Note:
● It can also operate on TOPWin software under the conditions of not
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 98/376
- 9 -
connect with programmer. After get the prompt of “can not turn on
equipment”, press “OK” to enter offline operation.
● For the operation which concerned with device read and write, it should
operate in the corresponding dialog box after select the model.
Chapter II File Operation
2.1 File Menu
"File" menu includes the file access and print operation, the format applies
to binary system, hexadecimal and JECED. The file menu's functions are:
2.1.1 Create New File
:to create a new file.
2.1.2 Loading
The corresponding tool icon button is "Loading"; to open an existing file in
the main window, and the file window will spring out after the performance:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 99/376
- 10 -
Select the file name, and then select the file format in the format dialog
box:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 100/376
- 11 -
After confirming the file format, start and end address of buffer zone
of the opening file, load the file data into the buffer zone, it will run as
follow:
After the loading of file data into the buffer zone, if required to amend,
move the mouse or keyboard to the relative byte and input the number
directly. But the input number must be two hexadecimal numbers.
If there is a large volume data, and the target data is not in the window,
please use editing key "Page Up", "Page Down", "Home" and "End" to turn
page, or you can input the address on the right of the "Start Address" at the
bottom of the data window and press "Enter", the window will move to the
"Address" immediately.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 101/376
- 12 -
PLD device introduces JECED formatted file of fuse diagram info
with the extension of ".JED", after the data is loaded into the buffer zone, it
will run as follows:
2.1.3 the Saving Buffer Zone
Its corresponding tool icon button is "Save", it is to save the content of the
buffer zone.
2.1.4 Print
Select the file mode of printing and print the file
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 102/376
- 13 -
2.1.5 Set up Printer
Specify the type of the printer and its ports
2.2 Modify Menu:
The operation is to edit the data in the buffer zone.
2.2.1 Fill Buffer
The corresponding tool icon button is "Fill Buffer". The operation can fill in
the buffer zone units with required data.
Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs, input the start
address, end address of the infill block, and the data to be filled in, and
press "Yes".
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 103/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 104/376
- 15 -
Press "find next" to find now. And continue to press "find next" to find
again.
2.2.3 Replace Characters:
The operation is to replace the text characters. After the performance,
springs out the dialog box of Replacing as follows:
● Input the text to be substituted in "Find what" frame, or paste from
the clipboard.
● Input the text to replace in the "Replace With" frame.
● Press "find next" first to find the character string to be replaced;
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 105/376
- 16 -
● Press "Replace" (p) button to perform the replacement.
Note: To replace the next, you must press "find next" first, and then
press "Replace" to perform replacement.
2.2.4 Repeat Last Find (F3):
For the text which has been found once before, you can press F3 to
find the next position repeatedly.
2.2.5 Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone:
The size of the file buffering zone is typically similar with the file size.
If you want to add data, you must extend the end address of the file
buffering zone.
Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs out, input the end
address on the right of "End Address" and then presses "Yes".
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 106/376
- 17 -
Data filling, extending or shrinking the file buffering zone can also be
performed in the buffer zone area by clicking the right button of the mouse.
The menu popup is as follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 107/376
- 18 -
Chapter III Device Operation
3.1 Conventional Procedures
Connect to TOPWin correctly; power indicator (red) turns on.
Run “TOPWin.exe”, and working indicator (green) turns on.
Select “File” in the main menu, and upload data to the file buffer.
Insert the device into the socket and lock it up, and then be ready for
written-in and read-out operation of device.
3.2 Operate Menu
3.2.1 Select Type
The corresponding device button is “Type”; pull down the pop-up
Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type” after operation.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 108/376
- 19 -
The procedures to select “Type” of device are to confirm the type of
device in order of “Type->Manufacturer->Type”.
● Input key word in the right of “Search” in first line; if the key word
is “51”, this step can be omitted.
● Select “Type of Device” in the “Type” menu, like EEPROM.
● Select a manufacturer from the list of “Manufacturer”, like
“ATMEl”.
● Select a device type from the list of “Device”, like select “89c51”.
If select a memory, press “Detect Manufacturer Code” to a get 2-byte
code, the first byte of which denotes a manufacturer and the second one
denotes a device type.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 109/376
- 20 -
And then, press “Confirm” to enter write-in and read-out operation.
3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device
The corresponding device button is “Read/Write”; Different device types
have different read/write windows correspondingly. They are respectively
described as follows:
1. Read-Write Combined Memory
Take 29c010 for example, select the following item from the Window
of “Select Manufacturer/Type”
Type: EEPROM
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: AT29C020
Press “Confirm”, pop up combined memory read-write Window as
follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 110/376
- 21 -
● Write-in Device
The write-in device is to write the data of the buffer into a device. The
default values of File Start Address and Device Start Address are 0, which
implies writing data into all the units of this device. While the length of the
data can be up to six bits hexadecimal (HEX) numerals and the maximal
address space is 8M. If necessary, user can follow required conditions to
modify start address, so as to fulfil the intention to write in.
The procedures to write in device are visually displayed via a
progress bar. If confront with some units fail to write in, it will exit from
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 111/376
- 22 -
the write-in procedures and display fault address, data in buffer and
contents of device data.
Cautions:
Before write in device, special attention should be paid to not to
mistake device types, otherwise, device or devices might be damaged,
owing to the device types are totally different, the corresponding serving
programming voltage might be different. After confirm all configurations
are all right, insert the device to be programmed into the corresponding
sockets, and then level lock-up spanner.
● Read-Out Device
Read out all the data in the device and write them in the buffer, and
then do page display in the data Window. The read-out procedures are
visually displayed via progress bar. User can modify the read-out data and
store them into a disk (the format of the file should be consistent with the
built-in file format of the device).
● Erasing:
Erase all contents of the device memory. After being erased, the
device shows “FF”. Only EEP device can use this command, and EPROM
needs to be erased with ultraviolet radiation.
● Blank Check:
Before write in device, it is required to check whether there is a blank.
Each byte of the Blank is “FF” (HEX).The check-out procedures are
visually displayed via progress bar. When find out some non-blank unit, it
will exit from the blank check-out procedures and display the address and
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 112/376
- 23 -
data of the non-blank unit.
This operation will check out all address space of EPROM, which is
independent of the device start address or the data length. EPROM can be
checked after being irradiated with uviol lamp, if still fail to pass, it is
proved that the device was already damaged.
● Data Censor:
This operation compares the data in the buffer with those in the device,
which is visually displayed via progress bar. When confront with any unit
fails to be censored, it will exit from the data censor procedures and visually
display the fault unit address, the data in the buffer and the device data.
For ensuring the written-in data in the device are correct, the “write-in
device” operation should include the censor procedures. Therefore, no
repetition of the same operation is required.
● Protection:
Many EEPROM and FLASH ROM have protection functions. The
device with protection function can only be read out, instead of being
written into, unless invalidate the protection function. This operation is
generally applied with completion of write-in operation.
● Protection Invalidation:
It is in reverse with that of protection function.
● Read-Out Manufacturer:
The former byte of the two-byte read-out code denotes the
manufacturer, and the latter one denotes the type.
● Write-In Speed
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 113/376
- 24 -
The programming speed of products by different manufacturers is
totally different, and even if some products with different types are made by
a same manufacturer, their programming speed might be different. It can
generally be set into the standard speed.
● “Automated” Programming Operation
This operation will automatically finish the device programming on
the base of the selection in box of “Combined Operation”, which can
advance the programming efficiency of device.
2. Read-Write MCU/MPU
Take 89c51 for an example, select the following items from the
Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type”
Type: MCU/MPU
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: AT89c51
Press “Confirm”, pop up a MCU/MPU read-write Window as
follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 114/376
- 25 -
● The following operation procedures are as same as those of the
combined read-write memory.
Write-in Device, Read-out Device, Erasing, Check Blank, Data Censor,
Manufacturer Read-Out, and Automated Operation.
● Encryption:
The encryption method can adopt different method to encrypt the
MCU/MPU.
● Check-Out Voltage
The device working at lower voltage should select corresponding
check-out voltage to verify written-in codes, so as to ensure the written-in
codes are all correct. The check-out voltage won’t influence on the write-in
voltage and the read-out voltage.
● Write-In Speed:
There are only two options available. With manufacturer’s rapid
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 115/376
- 26 -
reform of processing crafts, the delay time to write in device may be
different. In generally, lower speed is better, although it may waste much
time.
3. Read-Write Serial Port Memory
Take 24c02 for example, select the following items from the Window
of “Select Manufacturer/Type”
Type: Serial Port Memory
Manufacturer:
Device: 24c02
Press “Confirm”, pop up serial port memory read-write Window as
follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 116/376
- 27 -
● Select Write-In Speed:
The write-in speed of the serial port memory has much variation. It is
not wrong to select the lowest one, while the write-in period might be longer.
If proper speed is required, it is recommended to select different speed
experiments to achieve. When the speed is too high, the adjacent data might
encounter with repeated faults. In generally, it is relatively suitable to adopt
2-20mS.
● Read-Out Device:
It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write
memory”.
● Write-in Device
These series of device are written in replacement mode, namely, these
apparatuses are in no need of being erased.
● Comparable Data:
It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write
memory”.
4. Read-Write PLD
Take ATF20V8B/L for example, select the following items from the
Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type”.
Type: Programmable Logical Drive
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: ATF20V8B/L
Press “Confirm”, pop up a PLD read-write Window as follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 117/376
- 28 -
● Read-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the
“combined read-write memory”.
● Write-in Device
Before write the data of the file buffer into a device, it is required to
get the file data be ready in advance. PLD device adopt the "fuse file” with
extension of “.JED” in format of JECED, and the device should be blank,
otherwise, it will fail to be written into.
● Check-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the
“combined read-write memory”.
● Erasing Device:
The original contents in the erasing device include and/or matrix fuse,
structure control field, attribute field and so on.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 118/376
- 29 -
3.3 Automatically Detect Manufacturer and Type:
Chapter IV SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test
4.1 SRAM Test
With the example of 628128, select in Select Manufacturer/Type box
Category: SRAM Test
Manufacturer: STAND
Part Series: 628128 128K * 8
Press “Yes” button, popup SRAM Test Window as follows:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 119/376
- 30 -
The menu is chiefly used to test the common static storage SRAM. Press
Auto button, and the programmer tests each byte of memory to ensure the
test is performed stably.
Reading and writing operations of self-battery static memory are reserved
in the operational functions, such as many series of products produced by
DALLAS manufacturers, to meet some users' requirements.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 120/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 121/376
- 32 -
times.
Chapter V System Settings
5.1 Set Menu
5.1.1 System Status
The corresponding button is Link
1. Win version information
Display the version information of programmer software
2. Programmer TypeDisplay the type of current programmer.
3. Test USB load current
Displaying the grades from 5 to 10 represents norm, the higher grade is, the
stronger driving is. For example, in case of the grade lower than 5, connect
keyboard power supply cable (additionally purchase), otherwise connect
external 5V/2A regulator (Refer to the hardware specification in case that
specific model is outfitted with accessories).
4. Serial Number (SN)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 122/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 123/376
- 34 -
The Window includes three option items, with which the user can make
settings in accordance with their own requirements.
1. Linear Increment Option:
Input the address of additional information in Start Address edit box, and
the address generally behind files must reserve an unspent space in the
device. If the space of device is full of user files' code, the additional
information cannot be written again.
Select byte size of information in Byte Size edit box, the max is 8-byte
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 124/376
- 35 -
(64-byte binary integer).
Input an initial integer in Number Value edit box, the integer will change
later.
Select increment that is integer in Increment edit box. If there is a negative
sign in front, the integer is Decrement.
Select Allowable Linear Increment.
2. Date & Time Option:
Input the address of accurate date in Start Address edit box.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 125/376
- 36 -
Select Allowable Date & Time.
Date & Time that needn't be input by user is auto created by computer.
3. Quantity Option: (The contents is unsuitable for TOP853)
Quantity Mode: if allowable, press Auto button a time while writing a
device, and then it can auto detect whether the device is pinned securely.
Once the device is properly installed, the writing process starts instantly.
After fully running a time, it will display "OK, Please take away the
completed device". Once take away the device, it display "Place a new
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 126/376
- 37 -
device". After place a new device, the program will auto-cycle operation as
testing all pins well connected. Avoid repeatedly pressing mouse, and be
suitable for writing in large quantity.
Note: Exit circulation in case of not inserting a new device within 5
minutes.
Test the pins' connecting state: If allowable, test whether the pins of a new
device are well connected in each individual operation, in case that any pin
is poorly connected, report immediately, and stop operating.
Speedily test overrun electric current: Even if the Option is forbidden, the
result from testing overrun electric current is available, except for slowing
down the speed and desensitizing the test.
5.2 Window Menu
5.2.1 Tile
The opened file data are displayed in the entire data buffer.
5.2.2 Overlap
All opened files are displayed in overlap mode.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 127/376
- 38 -
5.2.3 All Displays
Display all opened files, each Window non-overlapping.
5.2.4 Display buffer Window
Display the file data of buffer or the written data from a device.
Appendix: Hardware Characteristics
TOP853 Universal Programmer
TOP853, featured by small size, low power consumption and high
reliability, is a universal mode of programmer designed for
developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories.
TOP853 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and
high unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit
for mobile use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
Support 5V device;
Adopting USB interface power supply in stead of external power
supply;
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 128/376
- 39 -
Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transmission
rate of 12MHz/s;
Adapting to battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against
damage;
USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
40-pin universal locking socket;
Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)
2.Volume: 142 x 103 x 23
3.Weight: 250g
4.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
5.Locking bed: 40 pin home-made socket
TOP853 Suite:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 129/376
- 40 -
1. A TOP853 host;
2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
3. A TOP853 Universal Programmer instruction book;
4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
5. A TopWin software CD attached.
TOP2048 Programmer
TOP2048 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing
MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of
small size, low power consumption and high reliability.
TOP2048 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high
unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit for mobile
use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;
Adopting USB interface power supply as well as 5V external power
supply;
Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transmission
rate of 12MHz/s;
Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against
damage;
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 130/376
- 41 -
USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
All- pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;
48-pin imported universal locking socket adapting to all kinds of
universal adaptors;
Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)
2.Measured speed(PIII/800M,Windos98se,USB1.1):
28F320 write & check, 104 seconds
29LF320 write & check, 112 seconds
P89c58 write & check, 5 seconds
3.Volume: 155 x 110 x 26
4.Weight: 350g
5.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 131/376
- 42 -
6.Locking bed: 48-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable)
TOP2048 Suite:
1. A TOP2048 host;
2. A 5V/2A regulated power supply (alternated);
3. A SDP-UNIV-44 universal adaptor (simple);
4. A PLCC32 adaptor (simple);
5. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
6. A TOP2048 Universal Programmer instruction book;
7. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
8. A TopWin software CD attached.
Typical Universal Adaptor Reference
1. SPD_UNIV-44 PLCC44 (*P44)
2. SPD_UNIV-44 SOP44 (*Q44)
3. PLCC32
4. SOP44
5. SDP-UNIV-48 TSOP48
6. SDP-UNIV-40 TSOP40
7. SDP-UNIV-i320 uBGA48
TOP2005 Programmer
TOP2005 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing
MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 132/376
- 43 -
small size, low power consumption and high reliability.
TOP2005 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high
unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing
use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
suporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;
Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power source;
Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of
12MHz/s;
Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage;
USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;
40-pin imported universal locking socket;
Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 133/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 134/376
- 45 -
unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing
use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;
Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power
source;
Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of
12MHz/s;
Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against
damage;
USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;
40 pin imported universal locking socket;
Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 135/376
- 46 -
2.Volume: 168 x 115 x 26
3.Weight: 280g
4.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
5.Locking bed: 40-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable)
TOP2004 Suite:
1. A TOP2004 host;
2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
3. A TOP2004 Universal Programmer instruction book;
4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
5. A TopWin software CD attached.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 136/376
Willem Programmer revision 3.1 with EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter
Two adapters were built to use the EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter :
First an EZO DIP32 to 32 pin connector is installed in the Willem ZIP socket.Second, the TSOP40_A3 adapter is plugged on the DIP32 adapter.
Chip programmed : Intel E28F004-B5T80 (COMPAQ M700 BIOS CHIP - corrupted)
EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter settings :
JP7 setJP8 set (a second pin set has been soldered on the other side of the adapter so that
jumpers can be placed on both JP7 and JP8 at the same time)The other 5 pines connectors is left OPEN (not used)
Remarks :
1- Pay attention when soldering the TSOP Meritec adapter on the board. There is an unused track on the leftside of TSOP40 pin1. Don't know why ?)
2- The Meritec TSOP socket is rather cheap BUT extremely difficult to solder on the PCB.The following method was used:
Gently "wet" all TSOP soldering tracks with fine solder (0.6mm) and a fine soldering tip.Gently "wet" each MERITEC soldering pin.
(if pines are shorted, you can easily remove the short with an ordinary pump.)Then apply flux on the soldering locations with a flux pen.Carefully align the Meritec socket and solder one pin on each side, i.e pin 1 and 40.Then, following the pre-wetted copper tracks from outside to the each pin, push the solderto each pin so that each pin is soldered correctly. The process has sometimes to be repeated,after putting additional flux.If there is a short between two pines, it can be removed ONLY with solder sucking wick !
(The pump nose is too tick)
Thoroughly clean (alcohol) any excess flux, as it may lower dramatically the impedance between tracks.Pay attention not to let flux go up to the Meritec contacts)Measure each connection with an ohm-meter
3- If TSOP40 pines have slightly been bent during the de-soldering process :Cut a piece of business card paper (0.3mm tick) so that it can be placed under the TSOP40.Place the piece of business card under the TSOp a place both on the surface of a mirror.Gently push down on each pin in order to re-align them in the horizontal plan.Re-align also the pines in the axial plan with fine tweezers.
4- Put the TSOP to be programmed in the Meritec socket using tweezers in the correct direction.5- Close and lock the Meritec socket.
NEVER INSTALL THE TSOP40 ADAPTER LOADED WITH THE CHIP BEFORE LAUNCHING THE PROGRAM.ONLY THE POWER LED MUST BE ON, THEN INSTALL THE TSOP ADAPTERS ON THE ZIF32 ADAPTER.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 137/376
DIP SWITCH settings on Willem board revision 3.1:
The program (revision 98i) does not give the correct settings when EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter is used.
Settings : SWITCH 1 OFFSWITCH 2 ONSWITCH 3 ON
SWITCH 4 OFFSWITCH 5 ONSWITCH 6 ONSWITCH 7 OFFSWITCH 8 OFFSWITCH 9 OFFSWITCH 10 ONSWITCH 11 ONSWITCH 12 OFF
OTHER JUMPERS on Willem board revision 3.1:
NORMAL - 29X040 set to 29X040 A18-A19-A20-A21-A22 set to A18 27SF left OPEN
Vpp 12.7, 14, 21V set to 12.7V (Vpp is tied to 5v on Ezo adapter via JP7)
With these settings, the chip is correctly identified as 0x89 Intel and 0x78 28F004T as a Top Boot Block device.(for Bottom Boot Block Device it should read 0x79 and display E28F004B)
To erase the chip select “Erase by Memory Map 8k/block ” option in the program (0.98i).This selects the slow erase method which is the one that works OK with that chip.(The fast one doesn't work)
The READ, ERASE or WRITE are very stable.
I'll try next to program AM29LV017 and AM29LV081 chips with a 3.3V Adapter (Vcc on board and adapter) andthe same TSOP combination.
The Willem programmer is really great and flexible ! It helped to revive a quite expensive Compaq Armada M700
completely dead !Thanks also to EZO for his great work on the simplified programmer and for his adapters.
Happy programming !
Yves ([email protected])http://home.tiscali.be/chipit for smartcard programming ...
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 138/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
1
1. INTRODUCTION........................................................... ................................................................... ...... 7
PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB I NTERFACE 7 PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB I NTERFACE MULTI-SOCKETS 8 PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC PARALLEL I NTERFACE 8 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 8
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 9 2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION ........................................................................... .............. 10
I NSTALLATION R EQUIREMENTS 10 HARDWARE I NSTALLATION 10
To Install the software from a CD drive 10 TO START THE WINDOWS SOFTWARE 10 TO INSTALL SOFTWARE AND CONNECT TO PC FOR USB PROGRAMMERS 10 TO INSTALL THE SOFTWARE FOR PARALLEL PORT PROGRAMMERS 17
To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site 17 SELECT PRODUCT 18
TROUBLE SHOOTING I N I NSTALLATION 19 3. FAMILIES OF PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES................................................................ ................ 20
NVM : NON VOLATILE MEMORY 20 ROM : R EAD O NLY MEMORY 20 OTP : O NE TIME PROGRAMMABLE ROM 20 EPROM : ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE ROM 20 EEPROM : ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE & PROGRAMMABLE ROM 20
NVM HIERARCHY 20 SERIAL FLASH EEPROM 22 SERIAL EEPROM 22
NON-TYPICAL DEVICES 23 8-BIT 1-MEGABITS 23 16-bit 1-Megabits 23
ERASING AN EPROM 23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 139/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
2
PLD 24 PLD Features 24
MICROCONTROLLER 25 ABOUT “DEVICE ID” AND “AUTO SELECT” ON EE TOOLS PROGRAMMERS 27
4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE............................ ................................................. 29
SAFETY NOTE CONVENTIONS 29 OTHER TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS 29 CHOOSING A R IGHT ADAPTER 29
Different Device Packages 30 Different Programming Adapters 31
5. QUICK START EXAMPLES.................................................................................................. ............. 32
PROGRAMMING AN EPROM WITH DATA 32 DUPLICATING AN EPROM FROM A MASTER IC DEVICE 34
6. MAXLOADER OPERATIONS............................................................................................................ 35
BASIC MENU SCREEN I NFORMATION 35 Option Information 35 (Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices) 36 System Information 36 Counter 36 File 37
Binary Format 38 Intel HEX Format 38 Motorola S HEX Format 39 TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT 40 ASCII HEX format 40
JEDEC Standard <PLD devices only> 41 POF file <Altera EPMxxx devices only> 43 File / Load 43 File / Reload 44
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 140/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
3
File / Save 44 File/ Load Project 45 File/ Save Project 45
Buffer 45 Buffer / Edit Buffer 45 Find 45
Find Next 46 Fill Buffer 46 Fill random data 47 Copy buffer 48 Fill Buffer 48 Print buffer 49 Set editor to view mode 49 Set editor to edit mode 50 Set Editor to binary mode 50 Set editor to 8 bit(byte) Hex 51 Set editor to 16 bit(word) Hex 51
Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex 52 Set default editor mode 52 Set default Reset Editor 53 Swap nibble 53 Swap byte 54 Swap Word 54 Swap double word 55 Jedec editor 55 Clear 57 Close 57 Buffer / Edit UES 57
Device 57 Select / Device select by history 58 Select 59
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 141/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 142/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
5
○ 15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses 76 ○ 16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses 76 ○ 17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector 77 ○ 18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector 77 ○ 19 Device/Option/Initialize Device 77
Device / Auto 77
Test ( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax ) 78 Test / Vector Test 78 Test / IC Test 79 Config Config / Select Product 80
Config / Config Option 81 Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading 81 Config Option / Blank Check Before Programming 82 Config Option / Verify After Reading 82 Config Option / verify after programming 82 Config Option / Byte order swapping 82 Config Option / Device Insert Test 84
Config Option / Device ID Check 84 Config Option / Sound 85 Config Option / Default Buffer Value 85 Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum 85
Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax) 86 Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer) 87
USB option / Enable START button 87 USB option / Good LED off on socket open 88 USB option / Enable “START ALL” button 88
Config Option / Gang Split Select 89 Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax) 89
Split 90 Device Address 92 File Load 93
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 143/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
6
File Save 93 Config Option / Auto Inc 93 Config / Hardware test 94 Config / Concurrent(gang) mode 94
How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ? 98 How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ? 101
Config / Language 104 7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT .................................................................. .. 104
1. R EGISTRATION 104 2. SOFTWARE UPDATES 105 3. TESTING THE HARDWARE 105 4. QUICK SELF-DIAGNOSTICS 105 5. CONTACTING CUSTOMER SUPPORT 106 6. SERVICE I NFORMATION 107 7. LIMITED O NE-YEAR WARRANTY 108 8. USEFUL WEB SITE ADDRESSES/ PHONE NUMBERS 109
9. PROGRAMMING ADAPTER MANUFACTURERS 110 10. EPROM EMULATOR MANUFACTURERS 110
8. OTHER PRODUCTS............................................................... ........................................................... 110
Optional EPROM Emulator 110
9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY................................................................................... ................ 112
COMPARISON OF NOR AND NAND FLASH TECHNOLOGIES 112 WHY NAND FLASH 112 HOW TO PROGRAM NAND FLASH 113 HOW TO READ NAND FLASH 113
10. GLOSSARY ....................................................... .................................................................... ............ 114
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 144/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
7
1. INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the operation of E.E. Tools’ programmers.
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax8G(4G) are software,
Maxloader, driven device programmers. The information contained in this
manual has been reviewed for accuracy, clarity, and completeness.
Please report in writing any errors or suggestions to [email protected]
E.E. Tools, Inc.
4620 Fortran Drive Suite 102
San Jose, CA 95134 USA.
www.eetools.com
Tel : (408)263-2221 Fax : (408)263-2230
E.E.Tools reserves the right to use and distribute any information supplied
without obligation.
Programmer Models for PC USB Interface
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 145/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
8
Programmer Models for PC USB Interface Multi-Sockets
Programmer Models for PC parallel Interface
About This Manual
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) User Guide
explains how to install and run the programming software in your computer.
Chapter 2 contains instructions for installing and running Maxloader.
Chapter 3 describes the most popular programmable devices.
Chapter 4 contains all terms and symbols used in the manual.
Chapter 5 describes basic operating examples of programmers.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 146/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
9
Chapter 6 is organized by main operating commands and gives detailed
instructions on each command.
Chapter 7 provides troubleshooting information for identifying and
solving problems with programmers. It provides a detailed guide for E.E.Tools’
technical support and return material procedures.
Chapter 8 introduces a useful product, EPROM Emulator.
Chapter 9 describes the recent information of NAND Flash Chapter 10 contains glossary about programmable devices and package
types.
This Manual assumes that you have a working knowledge of your personal
computer and its operating conventions.
General Description
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G /4G are software
driven device programmers that support a wide variety of programmable
devices including: EPROM, EEPROM, Serial PROM, EPLD, PEEL, GAL,
FPGA, and single chip Microcontroller.TopMax/ChipMax easily connects to the parallel printer port of any IBM PC,
and can operate with a full spectrum of IBM compatibles: PC 386, 486, Pentium,
PS/2, portable (laptop), and clone computers. TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-
8G(4G) connects to the USB(2.0) port of any IBM PC, and can operate with a
full spectrum of IBM compatibles.
The great advantage of a programmer is their programming speed and
superior software. All programmers are controlled via a host IBM PC computer.
The operating software has a user-friendly interface that includes window pull-
down menus and virtual memory management to deal with very large files.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 147/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
10
2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION
Installation Requirements
Maxloader is designed to operate with any 386, 486, Pentium, PS/2, Portable
(notebook), compatibles running WIN 95/98/ ME/NT/2000, and XP. The
computer requires a CD-ROM drive, but a hard disk drive is also recommended.
Hardware Installation
The following section details the procedure for accomplishing the hardware
installation procedure. TopMax / / ChipMax easily connect to any parallel
printer port in your computer and TopMaxII / ChipMax2/ UniMax / ProMax-
8G(4G) connects to USB 2.0 port in your PC.
To Install the software from a CD drive
Place CD-ROM in the CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Choose a programmer model from the list of files located on the menu
screen. And then The SETUP program will launch the installation procedure.
To Start the windows software
To run the windows software, select your product model shortcut in the
Windows Start Menu / Programs list.
From Configuration Menu, you can choose one of the
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) that you use.
To install software and connect to PC for USB programmers
The software works with Windows OS 98, SE, Me, 2000, And XP. Follow the steps below for Windows. 1. Make sure a programmer is not connected to your computer, then turn on
your computer.
2. Note: If you see New Hardware Wizard screen and disconnect your
programmer. You cannot install programmer software that way.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 148/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
11
3. Insert the CD-ROM from factory (EE Tools) in your CD-ROM or DVD
driver.
4. Wait until you see this screen then Click on Device Programmers and choose
a programmer name. The executable file name for the installation is in the CD-
ROM.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 149/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
12
Note: Customers who want to install the latest software may download the
maxloader file from www.eetools.com
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 150/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
13
5. Set up maxloader software
6. Install Maxloader and the maxloader icon and USB driver (eetusb.inf and
eetusb.sys files) will be generated in directory C:\program files\EE Tools\.
Follow the steps below for installation for USB 2.0 driver. 7. Connect a USB cable between programmer and your computer and turn the
power switch ON after connecting the power cord in the programmer.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 151/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
14
Note: In Windows2000, you need to choose “specific location” when the
“Found New Hardware Wizard” appears. The USB driver files are generated indirectory C:\program files\EE Tools. Or you can find the USB driver files in
the CD-ROM comes in the product package.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 152/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 153/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
16
Note: For a computer that doesn’t installed USB 2.0 controller, you need to
install USB 2.0 driver for the particular product vendor.
9. Execute Maxloader and choose Programmer model
10. Choose your programmer that is ready to be use in your computer.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 154/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
17
Note: Watch the model name in left-up corner screen and the TopMaxII won’t
be ready if “DEMO mode” appears in the screen. Check the USB cable and
turn on the AC switch in the back side of unit.
To install the Software for parallel port programmers
There are three different addresses for the parallel port. When you select an
address from LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, one of them should be valid without a
communication error message. Turn the AC switch ON before running the
Maxloader software. Make sure you connect the printer (IEEE) cable between
TopMax/ChipMax and your available printer port and lock the shields in each
side of the cable. Be sure that your programmer recognizes your computer’s
parallel port address when you execute the Maxloader icon. (MEMO mode is
indicated that your programmer has a “communication error”)
1. Connect print cable between PC and programmer.
2. Connect AC cord to programmer.
3. Turn on AC switch located on the back side of TopMax
4. Install programmer software that comes in a CD-R (or download the latest
software (all-in-one) from www.eetools.com
5. After the Maxloader is installed, you choose a programmer name in the very
first screen menu
To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site
1. Click on “Software download” button on left at www.eetools.com and
download maxloader software. The file will be saved to your hard disk. The
maxloader can be operated for All-in-one (all programmers-in-one software).
2. Once the download is complete, double-click on the file name to install the
software.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 155/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
18
NOTE: For the latest software upgrade, remove the old maxloader in
“Add/Remove Program” of “ Setting / Control Panel” in 2000/XP before
installing a new Maxloader in your PC.
Select Product
After Maxloader is installed, choose a programmer among TopMax, TopMax-
8G, ChipMax/ChipMax2, TopMaxII, UniMax, and ProMax8G(4G) hardware
in the very first Maxloader screen menu. Or Click on Config / Select product
Make sure to select the right model and turn the switch on. (TopMaxII, ProMax,
TopMax) or connect the AC cord (UniMax, ChipMax/ChipMax2)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 156/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
19
Trouble Shooting In Installation
A communication error may occur on the screen if the hardware / software are
not correctly installed.
Be sure that the following steps are checked: Make sure the USB driver is installed after Maxloader software is set up in
PC.
Make sure that the programmer hardware unit is connected to your PC
printer port or USB port directly. A programmer for parallel port interface will
not work with multiple port connectors.
Be sure your printer cable is firmly connected to your computer and the
programmer. Plug in the AC power cord to your programmer and turn on the
switch in the back of the unit before clicking on the Maxloader icon.
NOTE: The Maxloader detects the printer port address when you install the
new software. When you see “Cannot find the programming module,” go to
CONFIG/PORT and select all three parallel port addresses. If the same error
message continues, contact technical support.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 157/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 158/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
21
A B C(and) C(nand) A B C(or) C(nor)
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
Performance Comparison
* NAND Flash : High Wright Performance
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 159/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
22
Serial Flash EEPROM
The non-volatile Serial Flash Memory is widely used for code storage and user
settings in cost-sensitive applications such as CD and DVD players, set-top-
boxes (STB), digital-TV and cameras, graphic cards, printers, PC motherboards
and flat panel displays. These products typically run their operating code from
fast Random Access Memory (RAM), after downloading the code from the
low-cost Serial Flash Memory at power-up. Several semiconductor
manufacturers produce this device family named as 25xxx.
Serial EEPROM
These devices are electrically erasable, but they operate in a series rather than in
parallel.
Xilinx 17xx family
From the Xilinx 17xx series, the RESET Polarity can be changed only on Xilinx
17xxD/L and 17128. On devices with EPROM portion already programmed or
on new blank devices, RESET polarity is HIGH.
The current status of the Reset pin polarity is determined and displayed on thescreen after Reading the device. The polarity of the Reset pin can ONLY be
changed from HIGH to LOW, but not vice versa. To change the polarity, click
on the Option button and check the Reset bit box before programming your
device. To make certain that the RESET Polarity has been changed, read the
device again. On the other serial EEPROM devices (but NOT Xilinx 17xxD/L
& 17128) the RESET polarity is always HIGH and it can not be changed to
LOW.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 160/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
23
Non-Typical Devices
8-bit 1-Megabits
There are four types of 1 Megabits EPROMS. One set has the A16 and OE lines
swapped. However, this device will still program and verify like normal 1
Megabits. Once this device is placed into the circuit, it will appear as if it has
not been programmed correctly. This is not due to the Maxloader software orthe programmer, but the difference between these 1 Megabits. When selecting a
1 Megabit, it is important to determine which one you have. Here is a list of 1
Megabits and their equivalents:
27010 (normal pin-out -- program as GENERIC or INTEL 27010):
Equivalents: INTEL 27010, HITACHI 27101, TOSHIBA 571000, NEC 271001,
MITSUBISHI 27101, 27301 (non-standard pin-out -- program as HITACHI
27301's):
Equivalents: HITACHI 27301, NEC 271000, MITSUBISHI 27100, TOSHIBA
571001, INTEL 27C100
16-bit 1-Megabits
Any devices with the number 27210, 271024 and the MITSUBISHI 27102.27011: The 27011 is a 28-pin 1-megabit device that is organized into 8 pages of
16k-bytes. NOTE: The 27512 is 4 pages of 16k-bytes.
Erasing an EPROM
An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. Erasing
an EPROM is done by exposing the EPROM to high-frequency ultra-
violet(UV) light waves. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 15-20 minutes, but
may be shorter or longer, depending on the device. If you wish to purchase an
Eraser, call E.E. Tools at (408) 263-2221. When an EPROM is not being erased,
the window may be covered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of
years) an EPROM will start to erase due to the rooms level of fluorescent light.Direct exposure to sunlight also has the same effect, but happens much more
rapidly
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 161/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 162/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
25
PROM: For many years, the PROM was not classified as a PLD, even
though most of the smaller PROMs (i.e. 32 x 8 organization) were being used as
logic elements. The larger PROMs were still applied in bipolar microprocessor
designs to store microcode instructions. The PROM has an architecture similar
to the PAL, except that the PROM’s AND array is fixed while it’s OR array is
programmable.
FPLA: The field-programmable logic array (FPLA) consists of a
programmable AND array like the PAL, with a programmable OR array like the
PROM. The FPLA is therefore a more general PLD because any product term
may be connected to any output OR gate. Because the entire IC is
programmable, the FPLA can implement some functions which a PAL or
PROM may not be able to implement.
EPLD: Several manufacturers produce PLDs which can be erased and
reprogrammed like EPROMs. These ICs are called erasable programmable
logic devices or EPLDs. Internally, they have the same programmable AND-OR-register structures of the PAL and FPLA.
Microcontroller
These devices are CPU's with on-chip EPROM and RAM. They are typically
40 pins and are UV erasable. They have part numbers such as Intel's
8748,8749,8751,8752 etc. A micro-controller is generally a computer-on-a-chip
with RAM, ROM, and I/O ports. Microcontrollers are usually used for specific
purposes, such as keyboard decoders, printers, clocks, telephones, CD-players,
or any other application that requires a small, on-board computer.
Microcontrollers are used to take the place of in-circuit logic, as it can be less
expensive and take less space. Also, since it is software driven, the device may be updated very easily. Micro-controllers have the ability to use internal as well
as external RAM. Also, micro-controller data may be encrypted or otherwise
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 163/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
26
secured to prevent copying of the data or program information. Microcontrollers
also have their own instruction set, usually very similar to familiar
Microprocessors (such as the 8080 or 8086). The INTEL MCS-51 family
features up to 64k each of internal and external memory, 32 I/O lines, interrupts,
timers, and bit-addressable RAM. Its instruction set contains 111 instructions.
However, for specific purposes, limited versions of the 51 family are available.
For instance, the Philips 87c751/87c752 families do not allow external RAM to be used, and have limited I/O channels, etc. However, these devices still allow
for data/program encryption and security levels. They are also less expensive
than the MCS-51 micro-controllers.
See the help selection under MAIN-MENU COMMANDS for Encryption and
Security-bit information.
NOTE: Programming Microchip PIC family
Microchip PIC series are different from other Microcontrollers in that
they have an EPROM area as well as a Configuration Fuse. The
Configuration Fuse in the PIC family is used to setup different
Oscillator types, to set Memory Code Protection and Watchdog timer,
and etc. To program this fuse:
1. Program the EPROM portion of the device
2. Click on Option
3. Make any changes if necessary
4. Click on the Program Configuration Fuses button to program
the fuse information that you want to program
5. Click on the Read Current Configuration Fuses button to read
back the current status of the fuse
6. Press the Close button
NOTE: In order to obtain more information about programming
the configuration fuse, please contact Microchip technology at
www.microchip.com or refer to their data book.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 164/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
27
About “Device ID” and “Auto Select” on EE Tools programmers
Most of the devices have their own manufacturer and device ID’s in each
programmable devices such as E(E)PROM / Flash Memory, PLD, and MCU.
However the old type of devices such as PAL, PROM, or 2816 does not come
with an ID because the IC makers didn’t put its ID for the older chip types.
(Auto Select)As you can see the “warning” in the Auto Select menu in Maxloader, we can
only guarantee the “auto select” function for 32-pin or less device in
E(E)PROM / Flash Memory. Since device library in programmer software has
information for these standard device, users can utilize this feature as their
purpose. However, all other devices such as PLD, Serial Memory,
Microcontroller, and FPGA are not able to be recognized by programmer
software automatically . We use this feature as optional device selection menu.
Auto Select command allows you choose an unknown device through device
IDs which were recorded in Maxloader library. Put a device up to 32-pin on
the ZIF socket of programmer and click on “Auto Select” in Select Device
menu. It will find out a correct device ID and choose a correct device for you.
(To Find a Device ID)
After selecting a certain device from Select Device menu and plug-in acorresponding device in ZIF socket, you can see the ID(s) when you pressing
“Shift” and “F1” keys in your keyboard.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 165/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
28
In the software menu, Chip(in socket) MFG(manufacturer) ID and DATA(insoftware) ID must be identical if your target device is valid .
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 166/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
29
If it does not, check the socket with your device if you use NON-Standard (DIP)
device or use test other devices in case the first device may be defective. This
ID check must be passed before further operation on your device.
4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE
Safety Note Conventions
NOTE assists the user in performing a task. It makes the job more easily
understood.
CAUTION alerts the user that unexpected results or damages to a device
may occur if an instruction is not followed.
Other terms and definitions are as follows
Toolbar : Clicking on a toolbar button manipulates operations or
commands for Maxloader programmer software.
Bold/Italics : actions items/software functions, i.e. Edit Button, IC Test,
or Change Algorithm.
Device : The IC you are attempting to read, program, or verify.
Buffer : The work area in your computer memory to execute Read, Save,
Program, and Verify. The Buffer size may be from 64K to 32 Megabytes.
NOTE: If the size of a device is bigger than the buffer size in your computer,
Maxloader will use the hard disk space (swapping). For this reason, the
Maxloader software can handle devices up to unlimited size of E(E)PROMs
with your standard memory space ( a minimum of 512KB RAM memory is
required).
Choosing a Right Adapter
Most programming adapters are simple package converters. They allow TSOP,
QFP, SOIC, or PLCC devices to plug into the same device’s DIP footprint.
These adapters are available for memory, logic, and Microcontrollers. They can
often be used with many devices from various manufacturers. For devices thatcannot use a generic footprint we have offered adapters to work with specific
programmers.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 167/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
30
Here is what you need to know to select an appropriate adapter.
1) A part number and manufacturer of your device.
2) A device package. (TSOP, PLCC, DIP, QFP, SOIC, etc.)
(Refer to the following package drawings)
3) Pin numbers in your device.
4) In some cases you need to know your device package dimensions for SOIC,
SSOP, and TSOP packages.
Different Device Packages
DIP PLCC QFP
TSOP SOJ SOIC
BGA PGA
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 168/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
31
Different Programming Adapters
PLCC-TO-DIP TSOP-TO-DIP
QFP-T
QFP-TO-DIP SOIC-TO-PLCC
BGA-TO-DIP DIP-TO-PLCC (for Emulator)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 169/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
32
5. QUICK START EXAMPLES
If you are using a programmer for the first time, this section will help you to
become familiar with the basic operating procedure. This section includes two
examples of device programming with your programmer.
Programming an EPROM with data
We selected an AMD 27C010 EPROM to show you how to program anEPROM. The 27C010 EPROM needs to be erased (blank) before this
procedure begins.
NOTE: EPROMs have a quartz window that can be erased by exposing the
EPROMs to Ultra-Violet(UV) light. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 10-30
minutes.
1. Click on the Maxloader icon in your desk top menu after installing the
Maxloader.
2. Check the optional configuration before programming begins.
3. Click on the Select button. There are two different ways to select the target
device from the menu: 1) by choosing the device manufacturer type using the
arrow keys or 2) by typing the manufacturer and the device names on NAME
box. Maxloader will display the names of the devices that have the best match
to your input. After selecting the device, the detailed device information box is
provided below the select menu screen.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 170/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
33
4.Click on the Load to load a file from a floppy or hard disk into the buffer.
Change your file directory by choosing a directory in Look in box. Choose a file
name and type of the file. Make sure that the file type is selected; ”All Hex
File” or “Binary file” is located in the File of type box.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 171/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
34
5. Insert the 27C010 device into the ZIF socket. After inserting the part, make
sure that the socket handle is down (close) to secure the chip.
See the illustration below:
6. Click on the highlighted cursor Blank Check.
NOTE: If an EPROM is not erased completely, it will not pass the Blank Check.
If an EPROM is damaged to begin with, it may not pass the blank check,
although it has been erased for a long time in UV eraser.
7. Click on the Program.
CAUTION : Do not touch the device while the BUSY green LED light is on
(programming is in progress).
After programming a device, the part is automatically verified. The Checksum
is calculated and displayed in the OPTION info. In order to verify your work,
read the programmed part again. If this Checksum value matches to that of the
programming checksum, then the 27C010 is programmed successfully.
Duplicating an EPROM from a master IC device
The following is an instruction on duplicating a programmed device. In order
to do so a source device and an erased (blank) target device are necessary.
Source Device: Programmed AMD 27C256
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 172/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 173/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
36
• H/W Rev : Hardware revision number for your programmer
• S/W Rev : Current Maxloader software revision number
• Serial No : Serial number of Maxloader hardware
(Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices)
The following information presents programming information of the selected
device.
• Algorithm : Programming Algorithm• Vccp : Main Power Supply Voltage
• Vpp : Programming Power Supply Voltage
• Tpwp : Programming Pulse Width
System Information
• Device Name : The current device number with manufacturer name
• Device Size : The size of device in HEX value
(Ending Address –Starting Address + 1)
• Free Disk : Check the free disk space for a big size E(E)PROM
programming.
• Adapter : Optional Adapter Name for Non-standard devices• Pins : Number of device pin
• File : Current working directory path and file name after
loading a file
Counter
• Devices/HR : Displays the estimated number of devices that can be
programmed per hour. This feature can only be used
when choosing the Program or Auto selection under
the Device button.
• Success : This number indicates the device programmed
successfully.
• Failure : This number indicates the number of device programming errors that occur during a programming cycle.
These could be either Blank Checking, Programming, or
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 174/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
37
Verification error .
• Count : This number indicates all devices executed successfully and
unsuccessfully.
NOTE: This feature is useful for repeat programming on the same device.
You can make an estimate time to perform the programming job and see
the successful and failed devices after finishing the Program or Auto
Repeat programming routine.
NOTE: The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain
a serial number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value.
Start : Start address of memory that contains serialized data
End : End address of memory
Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value
User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased
by one to the previous data.
File
Maxloader uses three different file types: BINARY, ALL HEX, and . POF. In
the file types box, a file type can be selected and loaded to the buffer or savedonto a disk. The default file type is the Binary file. The All HEX files can be
chosen by maneuvering the arrow button. All HEX files include INTEL HEX
(MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S (1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII HEX. OPF
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 175/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
38
(Programmer Object File) is a binary file generated by Altera assembler
(Quartus and MAX+PLUS II). This file should be loaded for Altera MAX or
EPC family devices only.
Binary Format
Binary format does not specify the address or checksum of the file. The file
contains the actual binary data. An example of this format is a DOS executable
file with an .EXE or .COM extension. Binary format is generated for
programmable memory devices. It is recommended to save your EPROM data
as binary format in order to load the file as a standard file format later.
Intel HEX Format
Intel HEX format files are text files that include the file information in
hexadecimal.
1 : A record mark
2 – 3 Byte Record length in 2 digit HEX, Max 20 (64 in
ASCII)
4 – 7 Address 4 digit HEX Field. Most significant byte first
8 – 9 Byte 2 digit field record type :01 End of file
02 Extended address
10 – N Data Data field in HEX digits
N+1 – N+2 Check-Sum Two digit HEX Check-Sum character computed
by two’s complementing the sum of previous
bytes except the ‘:’
INTEL HEX FILE EXAMPLE
:110000000444154414D414E2053332053455249414C73
:00000001FF
The extended address record specifies the index address where data will be
loaded into. The Extended Address will continue to offset data record addressuntil a new Extended Address record is specified.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 176/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
39
:02 0000 02 4A29 02
Check Sum
Index address
Record type
Address
Record Length
• The Address field is blank because this record is not data.
• The record length is '02' for index address (2 Bytes).
NOTE: If the address for the data record is '2B56', the actual address will be
4A290 + 2B56 or 4CDE6(HEX).
Motorola S HEX Format
The Motorola S format file is an ASCII-HEX file.
Position (Byte) Character Remarks
1 S Letter S indicates start of record
2 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9 A single character indicates the type of
record.
9: End-of-file
3: 32-bit address data record
2: 24-bit address data record
1: 16-bit address data record
0: Header
3 - 4 Bytes Byte COUNT in HEX (multiply by two
for number of characters). This count
includes the address, data, and
Checksum field.
5 - X Bytes Memory Address for the current record.
X will be:
8 : 16-bit addressing for files less than 64K.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 177/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
40
10: 24-bit addressing for files greater than 64K.
12: 32-bit addressing for files greater than 64K in
length.
X+1 - N Bytes HEX Data (two per byte)
N+1 – N+2 Check-Sum Two digit HEX Check-Sum character
calculated by one’s complement
of DATA, ADDRESS and COUNT.Motorola File ExampleS325200000002F0000EA060000EA0B0000EA100000EA160000EA0000A0E11B0000EA210000EA31
The file offset address is “20000000 ,” so you should put this value in the
“file offset” of “File Load” config option / address menu.
TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT
The Tektronix HEX format contains ASCII records, expressing bytes
ASCII pairs.
Position Character Remarks
1 / Slash character for start of line
2 - 5 2Bytes Address. MSB first load6 - 7 Byte Number of data bytes (not checksums)
8 - 9 Byte Check-Sum of ADDRESS and COUNT
by character in HEX (not by byte)
10 - N Data Data bytes as ASCII pairs
N+1 - N+2 Byte Check-Sum of Data by character (not as
bytes)
Tek Hex Example
/00001102444154414D414E2053332053455249414C8F
/01000001
ASCII HEX format
This selection generates an ASCII coded HEX format for either 4-bit or 8-bit
PROMs. Each record contains a four-digit HEX address (16-bit) followed by 16
data elements. A 16-bit checksum is at the end of the file.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 178/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
41
When this format is selected, the device base address must be specified. This
address represents the lowest address in the device. The file created contains an
entry for each location in this device. ASCII HEX format can be created for
programmable memory devices only.
JEDEC Standard <PLD devices only>
JEDEC (Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council) files are the standard
method for describing PLD fuse patterns and test vectors. JEDEC files contain
fuse data, test vectors, part numbers, and checksums. The checksum of the file
allows you to verify that a given file is intact and has not been unintentionally
modified. JEDEC files normally use the extension (last 3 letters) “.JED.”
For more information on the JEDEC standard, contact:
Global Engineering Documents Inc. at (800) 854-7179
Electronic Industries Association at (202) 457-4900.
Following is an example of a JEDEC file:
<STX>File for PLD 15S8 Created on 11-SEP-96 5:08PM
2754 memory decode 345-432-123
Seung Park PK Logic corp.
QP20* QF448* QV8*
F0*X0*
L0000111110111111111111111111111*
L0028101111111111111111111111111*
L0056111011111111111111111111111*
L0112010110110111101111111111111*
L0224011110111011101111111111111*
L0336010101110111011111111111111*
V0001000000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0002010000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0003100000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0004110000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0005111000XXXNXXXHLHHXXN*
V0006111010XXXNXXXHLHHXXN*
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 179/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
42
V0007111100XXXNXXXHHLHXXN*
V0008111110XXXNXXXLHHLXXN*
C124E*<ETX>8646
STX The fuse map begins with an ASCII STX character (02 HEX)
Design Specification This item is user specific. While no format rules apply,
certain information, such as user’s name, company, design
date, part designation, revision and device part number,should be entered. This field is illustrated by an asterisk
(*).
QP Specifies the number of pins in the devices.
QF Specifies the number of JEDEC fuses in the devices.
L The fuse list fields contain the state of all fuse links in the
devices. The starting fuse number follows the L specifying
the field type. The fuse list that follows contains a zero (0)
for each intact link and a one (1) for each blown link. An
L field is generated for each product term in the device.
C The checksum field contains the 16-bit sum of the link
stated in the 8-bit words.ETX The fuse map ends with an ASCII ETX character (03
HEX).
Sum Check A 16-bit sum of the ASCII values of the characters from
STX to ETX inclusive. The sum check follows the ETX.
NOTE: LOGIC Compilers For PLD Devices: Software is available to help the
engineer develop designs using PLDs. Software tools called logic assemblers or
compilers translate a design file written in high-level language into a fuse
pattern stored in a JEDEC file. JEDEC files are produced by almost all PLD
development software’s and are accepted by the Maxloader programmer. There
are many commercial software packages available to help you design using
PLDs.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 180/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
43
POF file <Altera EPMxxx devices only>
The programming object file (.pof ) for an EPM7128A or EPM7256A device
can be programmed into the EPM7128AE or EPM7256AE device, respectively,
using the MAX+PLUS® II software version 9.6 and later or with 3rd party
programming software from EE Tools programmers.
For further question on POF file, contact http://www.altera.com/support/spt-
index.html.
File / Load
Data can be loaded into the memory from a device or by opening a data file.
Load fills your buffer memory with the data from storage for viewing or editing.
This command loads the data from the selected file storage into the memory
buffer. In order to the use “All HEX File” selection, the HEX file must be one
of the file formats supported by the Maxloader(TopMax/Chip Max), such as
Intel HEX(MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S(1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII
HEX.
The default selection on File Load menu is in Binary Format. To select any of
the HEX files mentioned above, choose “All HEX File” by pressing ⇓ button.
When you have selected the desired file, press the OPEN button to load the file
into the data buffer. If you are programming a PLD, you will want to load a
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 181/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
44
JEDEC file. The procedure is identical to loading a data file, except that the
files in the current directory will have the JED extension. If your selected
device is an Altera MAX family, the file you should load is a POF extension.
The Maxloader uses a RAM buffer to hold data. After loading a file into the
buffer, you can edit the buffer data. If you load a JEDEC file, you may use (the
vector pattern edit) command to view or edit the fuse map and (test/vectors) for
any test vectors that may have been in the JEDEC file.
File / Reload
Data can be reloaded into the memory from the file directories that contains
previously loaded files. Reload remembers your file location and type (Binary
or All Hex) that has been loaded into the buffer.
File / Save
Save the current data in your memory buffer to a disk storage by using one of
the current supported file formats.
Before saving a file, check the buffer and the file address ranges. The contents
of the buffer through the specified range will be written into the new file,
completely erasing any existing file with the same name. Before saving to a
disk, make sure that no file with the same name exists.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 182/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
45
File/ Load Project
A project file that saved by SAVE PROJECT menu is loaded. The project files
use the extension (last 3 letters) “.prj.”
File/ Save ProjectThis feature allows you to create a job description such as “engineer name” and
other useful information for records.
It is very useful for future use when you set up all possible environments such
as selecting a device, loading a file, and setting other configurations for
programming jobs. A job description can be saved as a file name and the same
project environment will be ready once you load the same project name.
File Name: A file name can be entered with the 3 letter extension “.prj.”
Author: An engineer’s name [whom creates this project].
Description: A job explanation that you memorize for your future usage. A
device number, File name, and checksum number can be entered in the note pad.
Other programming menu descriptions, such as configurations can be described.
Buffer
Buffer / Edit Buffer
This command allows the user to examine and modify the contents of the
memory buffer. This section applies to a non-JEDEC file (PROM, EPROM,
EEPROM, and Microcontroller) or to a memory chip. If a PLD is being loaded,
see the (vector pattern edit) section. The data is presented in HEX and ASCII
formats.
FindThis feature allows you to search the data (ASCII and HEX) in the current
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 183/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 184/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
47
Fill Data: Two digits of HEX value to be filled between Start and End buffer.
Fill random data
Once you click this button, a random data stream will be filled in the entire.This will be useful before programming a device with full buffer data.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 185/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
48
Copy buffer
Copy certain data between 2 address to other location in the same buffer.
Fill Buffer
Enter certain data between 2 different buffer locations.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 186/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
49
Print buffer
The current buffer data can be printer in different formats. Also, you can review
buffer data with an editor in an utility software..
Set editor to view mode
This mode allows you not to modify data in the buffer.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 187/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
50
Set editor to edit mode
This mode allows you to modify data in the buffer.
Set Editor to binary mode
The data in current buffer will be changed as binary mode.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 188/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 189/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
52
Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex
The data in current buffer will be changed as 32-bit mode.
Set default editor mode
Make the current buffer mode as same data size as the selected device in the
current operation. It could be 8 or 16-bit depends on the device selection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 190/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
53
Set default Reset Editor
The cursor mode will be the first data in address 0..
Swap nibble
Swap each character(nibble) in 8-bit(1 byte) block.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 191/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
54
Swap byte
Swap each 8-bit(1-byte) data in each 16-bit(4-byte) block.
Swap Word
Swap each 16-bit(2-byte) data in each 32-bit(4-byte) block.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 192/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
55
Swap double word
Swap each 32-bit(4-byte) data in each 64-bit(8-byte) block.
Jedec editor
This buffer mode allows you to retrieve and modify data for PLD devices.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 193/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
56
The data can be displayed in two different mode(unused-bit “0” or “X”, used-
bit ”1”or “ –“.)
In the Jedec editor mode, you can still use all features in Buffer Edit Mode.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 194/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
57
Clear
Pressing this button allows you to fill the buffer with the data located in
“Default Buffer Value” in Config Option Menu.
Close
Press to exit the HEX Editor.
Buffer / Edit UES
The UES Edit command creates or changes the User's Electronic Signature
(UES) array in GAL device. Each GAL device contains an electronic signature
word consisting of 64 bits of reprogrammable memory. The electronic
signature word can be programmed to contain any identification information
desired by the user. Some uses include pattern identification labels, version
numbers, dates, inventory control information, etc. These features give the user
the ability to view and edit the UES data before programming a GAL device.
When the UES edit command is invoked, an editing data window appears. If
the data fields are empty, you may create a new UES. You can enter the UESup to eight characters in the HEX or ASCII data area. If you see any data from
the current UES window, it means the UES has been created and that you can
modify the data for a different reason. The UES data is not secured when you
execute the Function / Security command.
Device
This section presents the main operation menu for the target device that is
mounted on the ZIF socket. In order to process the following commands, make
sure that the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and the latch is
down.
NOTE: The Device Information display area presents the device information of
the selected device.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 195/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
58
Select / Device select by history
Pressing this button allows you to review all devices that have selected
before. You don’t have to select the same data again and just select from this
menu.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 196/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 197/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
60
logic function. This symbol makes a convenient reference when selecting the
PAL device that best fits a specific application
Select / E(E)PROM, FLASH
All EPROMs (27xxx), EEPROMs (28Cxxx, 29Cxxx), Serial E(E)PROMs
(17xxx, 24xxx, 32xxx, 33xxx, 35xxx, 59xxx), and Flash EPROM (28Fxxx,29Fxxx, 29LVxxx, 29BVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx) of 24/28/32/40/42 and up to
48 pins (1 Mbit, 2Mbit, 4Mbit, 8Mbit,16Mbit, 32Mbit, and up).
Select / PLD
EPLD, EEPLD, FPL, PEEL, GAL, MAX, MACH, PLS, PLD, PLC, PLUS,
EPM, ATFxxx, ATVxxxx, EPxxx, EPCxxx, 5Cxxx, 85Cxxx.
Select / Microcontroller
Intel 87xx, Phillips 87C75x, SGS-Thomson ST62xx, Atmel AT89Cxx, 89Sxx,
89LVxx, Microchip PIC12/16/17, Motorola MC60705xx,
MC68HC711xx/705xx/908xx; Zilog Z86Exx; NEC 8749H.
Select / PROM AMD 27Sxx, Cypress CY7Cxxx, Fujitsu MB71xx, Fairchild 63Sxx, NS
74Sxxx, Phillips 82Sxxx, WSI 57Cxx.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 198/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
61
Select / Auto Select
Identify the device that is mounted on the ZIF socket. This feature can only be
applied to Memory and some Microcontroller devices. Clicking the Auto Select
button will enable the programmer to identify the ID on the device and will
select the matching device in the library automatically.
NOTE: If you have a “Device not found" message, select the device manually.
If you have old devices or defective devices, TopMax will not be able to
recognize the ID code from your device.
Select / Device information
Pressing this button allows you to review the target device information before selecting a device.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 199/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
62
Select / Device information / Package details
Pressing this button allows you to review package information for a target
device before selecting a device.
Test / RAM Test
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 200/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
63
TopMax, TopMaxII provide an additional memory test function. This operation
tests static and dynamic RAM memory chips. The following memories are
tested:
DRAM types tested
- 16K*4, 64K*1, 64K*4, 256K*1, 256K*4, 1M*1
SRAM type tested
- 2K*8, 8K*8, 32K*8, 128K*8After inserting a memory device into the ZIF socket, select the memory type
from the device select “GENERIC RAM” selection screen and click on the
RAM test button.in the test menu.
The program will test each address of the memory. A "Defective memory"
message will be displayed with a current address if the memory has a defective
bit. "Good memory" will appear when the test has passed successfully.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 201/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
64
Device / Change Algorithm
Users are provided with an option of changing the programming parameters of
most devices. Once you select the “Change Algorithm” option under the
DEVICE menu, the user will be presented with a list of device specific
programming parameters, such as Vccp, Vpp, Read Vcc, Verify Vcc Low,
Verify Vcc High, Pulse Width, Over Pulse Width, Over Pulse Mul, and Retry
number. Each of these parameters can be selected and edited individually by
changing the existing numbers in the parameter box and pressing the close
button. The user will then be prompted to enter the new value for that
parameter.
CAUTION : Please note that before deciding to modify any programming
parameter, the user must consult the manufacturer programming specification
for that device. E.E. Tools will not be responsible for any damages caused by
any unauthorized modified programming parameters. Any changes in
programming parameters are temporary and the original parameter’s value
will be restored once the operation on that device is complete. However, the
user can store the modified programming parameter for a particular device by
using Macro command.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 202/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
65
Device / Blank Check
The Blank Check function is used to verify whether or not a device is in an
erased or unprogrammed state.
All EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) devices should be
checked before programming. EEPROM (Electrical Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory) based parts do not need this command becauseEEPROM’s are erased automatically before programming.
PLD based parts are checked by verifying all of the fuses that are intact. Any
erased PLD’s should pass this test.
NOTE: Erasing EPROMs. In order to clear data in an EPROM, the chip
should be exposed to a short wave UV (Ultra violet) light. Most erasers require
between 5 and 30 minutes erasing an EPROM. Some types of chips take longer
to erase than others. An EPROM based part (a PLD or Microcontroller) with a
security bit feature is designed so that the security address is typically the last
bit to be erased. If the window of a chip is not clear, try cleaning the window
with alcohol or a solvent. Erase chips if the chips are exposed to sunlight and
fluorescent light for months or years; your chips can be erased. You should
cover the window of the programmed chips with an opaque label to make the
data permanent. Some EPROM based parts can't be erased because they do
not have a window. These chips are called one time programmable (OTP)
EPROMs.
An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. An
EPROM is erased by exposing it to high-frequency ultra-violet light waves.
Erasing an EPROM usually takes from 15-20 minutes, but may be shorter or
longer, depending on the device. Many manufacturers make EPROM erasers. If
you wish to purchase an eraser, call E.E.TOOLS at 408-263-2221,
[email protected]. When an EPROM is not being erased, the window may becovered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of years) an EPROM
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 203/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
66
will start to erase due to the level fluorescent light in the room. Direct exposure
to sunlight also has this effect and happens much more rapidly and commonly.
NOTE: In order to decide if the device is blank, the user should read the target
device. If the buffer is filled with all FFs or 00s, the device is most likely in an
erased or unprogrammed state; otherwise, the device is not erased.
CAUTION : Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured even though they are not blank.
Device / Program
Program command will enable you to place new data from the memory buffer
into the target device. The BUSY GREEN led will be blinking during
programming. Make sure the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and
the latch is down. Then check the buffer device address range before you start.
The values will default to the size of the device.
NOTE: <MOTOROLA MICROCONTROLLERS>
The window of windowed devices must be covered with an opaque label during
operation at all times.
NOTE: For all DEVICE/FUNCTION operations, the ERROR YELLOW LED,
located at the bottom of the ZIF socket is used to indicate the status of the
complete operation. It will turn on if an error has occurred; otherwise it will
remain off.
Memory device
The target device must be blank checked unless the part is electrically erasable.
Although most of EEPROMs and Flash Memory devices have the ERASE
function in the menu, some EEPROMs such as AT28CXXX or AT29CXXX
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 204/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
67
don’t have the ERASE function. Note that EEPROMs without the ERASE
function are automatically erased before programming.
Programmable Logic Device operation
After programming is complete, verification should be performed according to
the semiconductor manufacturer's specifications. In order to test vectors, a
vector test should be performed (See vector test under the TEST menu). Finally,
the part may be secured so that its content can no longer be examined ormodified. The security function will not execute if the device fails to verify or
pass the vector test properly.
28C256, 28C010, etc.
28CXXX family devices support Software Data Protection. The user has an
option of either protecting or not protecting the data. This option must be
changed before the start of any programming operation. To change this option,
go to the Option selection under DEVICE/FUNCTION menu and make any
changes accordingly. To obtain more information about Software Data
Protection, please consult the device manufacturer’s specification.
Microchip PIC devices
Microchip PIC series is different from other Microcontrollers in that they havean EPROM area as well as a CONFIGURATION FUSE. The configuration
fuse in the PIC family is used to setup Oscillator Type, Memory Code
Protection, Watchdog Timer, or Processor Mode, and etc. After
programming the EPROM portion, change the fuses of the items listed under
Option . Then you must program the configuration option in the Option menu.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Program the main memory
2. Click on the OPTION button
3. Set all of the configuration fuse in OPTION menu
4. Click on the Program configuration fuses buttonYou may also read the status of the Configuration Fuse under the OPTION
selection. In order to obtain more information about programming the
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 205/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
68
configuration fuse, contact Microchip technology at 602-786-7200 or consult
the appropriate data book.
Copy from a master chip to a new chip
1. Select the master device from select menu in Microcontroller.
2. Put the chip on the ZIF socket.
3. Click on the Device button and read the chip.4. Click on the Option button and read the fuses.
5. Write down all of the option fuses [the memory protect must be
disabled] in order to copy the information from your master chip.
6. Place a new chip. It must be the same chip as the master chip.
7. The buffer still holds your master data and the memory portion.
8. Click on Option again and set all the fuses that you wrote.
9. (To change the option, use the arrow button in the selection box.)
10. In the same Option menu, Click on the program configuration fuses,
read and compare the fuses with your original device.
CAUTION : The PIC16C711 , will be used as an OTP (one time programmable)
chip when you erase the secured device. You cannot reuse the chip after erasing
it, even though the PIC16C711 is an erasable device.
MOTOROLA MC68HC908 devices
This device will require a security code in certain memory location when you
program a new device along with data and users must remember the security
data once read(copy)or verify the master device for duplication.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 206/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
69
Serial EEPROMsThese devices are electrically erasable, but they operate serially rather than
parallel.
Atmel or Xilinx 17xxx
You need to set the POLARITY FUSE with this family via the Option menu.
After programming the main MEMORY, go to the OPTION menu and make
the appropriate change. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the
POLARITY FUSE status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even
on some of the windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L &
17128), the POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device
manufacturer for further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE.
CAUTION : Do not touch or remove a device during an operation when the BUSY green led is on.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 207/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
70
Auto Menu Option
Device / Read
Read the data in the source device mounted on the ZIF socket into the buffer for
examination.
The checksum will be displayed on the checksum line. The buffer may be
edited, saved to a disk, or used to duplicate the chip.
CAUTION : Reading the device into the buffer destroys the buffer contents
through the specified range. Make sure everything in the buffer that is needed
has been saved.
PLD test vectors are not stored in a logic device; therefore, they cannot be read.
The test vector buffer will be empty after reading the PLD.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 208/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
71
NOTE: Devices that have been secured cannot be read properly. Secured chips
may appear all blank, fully programmed, or scrambled.
Device / Verify
Assure that data in the device matches data in the memory buffer. If your
device has the security fuse blown, a verification error is detected. The verifyoperation requires that the exact data pattern or file that was used to program
the device be resident in the memory buffer.
Device / Data Compare
Compares the data in device to the data in buffer and saves any difference into
the COMPARE.TXT file. When you have a verify error during the Verify
operation, the Data Compare command will be useful. It will detect a
difference between the device content and the buffer content and will write the
difference into the COMPARE.TXT file under the Maxloader
(TopMax/TopMax 8Gang/ChipMax) directory. You may view the file using
edited utility software.
Device / Erase
This option erases the data in your socket before programming it. This operation
is valid for only limited devices such as EEPROM, Flash Memory, GAL, PEEL
devices. EPROMs that have a window should be erased by UV EPROM erasers
externally (see NOTE “Erasing EPROMs” in this manual).
Device / Security
Secure a PLD or Microcontroller so that their content can no longer be
examined or modified. Security is confirmed when valid data can no longer beread or verified against a previously read pattern. To ensure that the security
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 209/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
72
fuse has been blown, the Security operation is preceded by a “read” of the
device and followed by a “verify.”
NOTE: Usually, on a UV erasable PLD or a Microcontroller, a secured device
may take longer to erase because the security bit address is designed to erase
last.
NOTE: When you click on OPTION, device security mode and option fuses will
be available for certain manufacture devices. Selecting these options, programmer will program your device with the checked options continuously. It
is a useful feature for users who like to program devices in volume quantities.
The user does not have to set the fuses or security modes for every
programming.
CAUTION : Some devices, such as Philips P89C52, can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured. Securing a device separates the
programmed data pattern from unauthorized access. This command appears
only when the selected device supports it. Some Microcontroller’s and PLDs
can be secured by programming a special address location. The security bit
will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a device is secured, it cannotbe unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the secured device is seen as a
blank chip even though it is not actually blank.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 210/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
73
Device / Encryption
The encryption table is a feature of the 87C51/87C52 family Microcontroller
devices. The Encryption array of the Microcontroller is initially unprogrammed
(all '1's). In order to protect the code from being easily read by anyone other
than the programmer, this feature allows you to program the encryption table
that is exclusive NORead with the program code data as it is read out. You
have to know its content in order to correctly decode the program code data.
Thereafter you will have to use the same displayed encryption array any time
you need to read back the device.
Device / Option
○ 1 Device/Option /Customer IDThe user can store checksum or other code-identification numbers.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 211/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
74
○ 2 Device/Option / Oscillator
Most PIC device family’s can be operated in four different oscillator modes.
The user can choose one of the following modes from the factory.
LP: Low Power Crystal
XT: Crystal/Resonator
HS: High Speed Crystal/Resonator
RC: Resistor/Capacitor
○ 3 Device/Option / WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT )
WDT is a configuration bit of special features for PIC device family’s.○ 4 Device/Option / POWER-UP TIMER
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○ 5 Device/Option / Memory Protect
This configuration fuse can be used to protect against spurious EEPROM writes.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 212/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
75
○ 6 Device/Option / Data Protect
This feature may be enabled or disabled by the user; when shipped from an IC
manufacturer, the Data Protect feature is disabled.
Devices have “Software Data Protection (SDP)” : Provides software features to
protect nonvolatile data from in advertent writes.
Disable: The SDP command will not protect the entire memory array.
Enable: The SDP command will protect the entire memory array.
Certain Flash device has “Sector Protection”
Protect All : By pressing the Protect All, no data will be erased or written into
the device. You can still read data from the device. The block(s) doesn’t allow
the device to be erased or programmed
Unprotect : The selected block(s) allows the device to be erased or programmed.
Toggle: Change the block status in reverse.
Write Device: The selected block status will be written in the device.
Close: Exit to main menu.○ 7 Device/Option / Reset Polarity
Reset Polarity (for Xilinx FPGA): The Polarity Fuse is ACTIVE HIGH when
shipped from an IC manufacturer. To change the polarity, click on the Option
button and check on the Reset bit box before programming your device. Once it
changes to ACTIVE LOW, it may not reset the ACTIVE LOW fuse to ACTIVE
HIGH. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the POLARITY FUSE
status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even on some of the
windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L & 17128), the
POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device manufacturer for
further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE.
○8 Device/Option / Drown OutThis is a special feature for the PIC device family.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 213/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
76
○ 9 Device/Option / MCLR
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○ 10 Device/Option / Memory Parity
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○11 Device/Option / Low Voltage PGM
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○ 12 Device/Option / FLASH Write EnableThis is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○ 13 Device/Option / Background DBG
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
○ 14 Device/Option / Brownout Voltage
This is a special feature for the PIC device family.
NOTE: All the Options above are described in the device manufacturer’s data
book. Make sure that you understand all configuration features before setting
the configuration fuses.
○ 15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses
In order to have the information of all configuration fuses, press this buttonand you can see all configuration data of the current device. Be sure that you
remember all the fuse’s information if you want to copy the configuration
information
○ 16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses
Pressing this button will store all configuration fuse’s information in the current
device located in the programmer socket.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 214/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
77
○ 17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector
In order to have the information of option bits, press this button and you can see
all option lock bit data of the current device. Be sure that you remember all the
fuse’s information if you want to copy the configuration information.○ 18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector
Pressing this button will store all lock bit information in the current device
located in the programmer socket.
○ 19 Device/Option/Initialize Device
Initialize function erases the whole memory array, security lock bits, and status
byte and boot vector into their initial erased state. Press this button before
erasing all 89Cxx family manufactured by Philips.
Device / Auto
Auto command will enable you to do the following command steam
sequentially and it is useful to program a volume quantity devices with the same
data.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 215/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
78
CAUTION : Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured without being blank. Securing a device
prevents the programmed data pattern into the device from unauthorized access.
This command appears only when the selected device supports it. Some
Microcontrollers and PLDs can be secured by programming a special address
location. The security bit will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a
device is secured, it cannot be unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the
secured device is seen as a blank chip even though it is not actually blank.
Test ( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax )
Test / Vector Test
Verifies that the PLD (PAL, GAL EPLD, etc.) currently behaves without
having to prototype a circuit. In order to perform test vectors, test vectors
should be in the JEDEC file when the file is loaded. Most PLD development
software will generate valid test vectors automatically. Test vectors may be
examined and modified with Vector Pattern Edit/^F6 command in the buffer
menu screen.
NOTE: Due to hardware’s limitation, Vector Test is only implemented on 24-
pin or less devices.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 216/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
79
During the vector test, TopMax applies high and low signals to the input pins of
a tested PLD and observes signals at the output pins. The output results are
compared to the expected results from the test vectors. Any difference will
show up as an error message.
The following are valid characters for test vectors:
0 Apply input logic low (Vil) to an input pin1 Apply input logic high (Vih) to an input pin
C Clock an input pin (Vil, Vih, Vil)
F Float pin
N Power pin or untested output pin
V VCC pin
X Don't care: output values are not tested
G GND pin
K Clock an inverted input pin (Vih, Vil, Vih)
H Expected result on output pin is Vih
L Expected result on output pin is Vil
Z Test for high impedanceOptional Operation
X value Optional value of “don’t care”
Vcc Test Vcc value on Vcc pin
Delay Test period of each vector in mill-second
Test / IC Test
This operation tests TTL or CMOS logic devices according to the test patterns
stored in the test pattern library.
Click on the Select button and enter a device name and click on Test to begin
the test function. A result message will be displayed after testing.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 217/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
80
Config Config / Select Product
After the Maxloader is installed, you can choose one of the programmer listed
in Select product menu.
Make sure that you select a right model and turn on the switch (TopMax /,
TopMaxII, ProMax-4/8G) or connect the AC cord (UniMax,
ChipMax/ChipMax2)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 218/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
81
Config / Config Option
Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading
When loading a file into the buffer, executing the ENABLE option fills the
buffer with the data that is defined in Default Buffer Value before the file is
loaded into the buffer. When you load a file that is smaller than the current
buffer size, the unfilled buffer will contain the Default Buffer Value so that you
may examine the buffer data more conveniently. DISABLE option keeps the
same data for the unfilled buffer area after Buffer Load command is executed.
NOTE: Buffer Clear means that the current buffer will be filled with the Default
Buffer Value. It can be any data of Hexadecimal values such as FF, 00, or XX
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 219/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 220/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
83
ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F 0123456789ABCDEF
00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#Eg . . ”3Duf w
00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Example #1: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even
byte swap = disabled)
The user data is allocated as follows:
DeviceMSB LSB
Device Address: 0 23 01
1 67 45
2 AB 89
3 EF CD
Sample data file (Motorola EXORmacs Format, Code 87):
S00B00004441544120492F4FF3
S11300000123456789ABCDEF001122334455667750
S9030000FC
Data file opened with format 87 and displayed in the editor (8-bit addressingmode):
CURSOR AT LOCATION: 00000000 8 BIT ADDRESSING
HEXADECIMAL ASCII
ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F 0123456789ABCDEF
00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#E.g. . . ”3DUf w
00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Example #2: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even
byte swap = Enabled)
The user data is allocated as follows
DeviceMSB LSB
Device Address: 0 01 23
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 221/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
84
1 45 67
2 89 AB
3 CD EF
Config Option / Device Insert Test
When enabled, this test will allow the Maxloader to first examine the physical
position of a device as it is sitting in the programming socket when the user
attempts to take any action to that device. Once it has finished examining, the
Maxloader will prompt the user for corrective steps if needed depending upon
the position of the device. Once you click on “Device Insert Test,” Maxloader
will display “Incorrect device ID” if your target device contains ID or if wrongdevice is placed inside the socket. You may see the same message if the device
has been secured or if the device ID has been erased. Click on “Yes” if you
want to ignore the manufacturer’s device ID and proceed.
Config Option / Device ID Check
Check the device with both manufacturer and device part number before run
any operation for the target device in the socket. If you program an EPROM,
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 222/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
85
you may allow to skip the device ID check routine when the device size and
programming voltage between the EPROM in socket and the part in menu.
Config Option / Sound
A default sound comes when you need attention during programming time such
as “blank check error,” “program error,” or “Verification error.”
Config Option / Default Buffer Value
Fill the buffer value (hexadecimal) with the initial data that you type in thisfield. This feature helps the user who wants to have different initial values ('00'
or 'FF') in the buffer. In most case, the default buffer value should be set up as
“00” before loading a hex file.
Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum
The digit of Checksum value appears in 4 (hex) numbers as standard checksum
Value.
For 8 digit checksum value, click on the option box “32 Bit check sum” and
maxloader display 8 (hex) numbers in the Check sum location.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 223/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
86
Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax)
A parallel port address can be determined by the Maxloader
(TopMax/ChipMax) software.
Auto : TopMax/ChipMax will select a valid parallel port as the default
address in your PC.
LPT1 : The parallel port 378 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
LPT2 : The parallel port 3BC in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
LPT3 : The parallel port 278 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
Port Speed: Because the ISA-bus clock speed is not as fast as that of the CPU,
we designed this option to facilitate the problem caused when using a fast
computer such as Pentium 90/133/166 MHz. The default value is 0. For
computers that have CPU speed of greater or equal to 133 MHz, we recommend
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 224/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
87
that you set the Port Delay to 40. In most cases, this option will help to solve the
communication problem between your PC and TopMax/ChipMax).
NOTE: TopMax / ChipMax power switch should be ON. The Parallel cable is
connected between TopMax / ChipMax and your PC parallel port. Make sure
that the shields on each side of the cable are locked. See section 6
Troubleshooting if you are having difficulty with installation and
communication.
Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer)
USB option / Enable START button
This option allows you to use a start key in USB programmer hardware rather
than PC control software. Once you check in the this option and choose a
master socket, the socket location will be selected as a master socket without
opening the gang program mode(separate menu screen). So you can the
multiple programmer ,ProMax-4G(8G), as a single-socked programmer. We can
see the socket number in either beginning menu screen or gang program mode
menu.
Enabling #4 socket to be master socket
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 225/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
88
USB option / Good LED off on socket open
This option enable the LED light will not blink after done an operation.
So, user can recognize the empty socket is not being effective for any operation.
USB option / Enable “START ALL” button
This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a
start button for all others. So, customers don’t need to press individual button as
an auto programming mode. Customers who want to operate a separate
operation for individual Start Button key must un-checked this option.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 226/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
89
Enabling any of button to be a “Start Key”
Config Option / Gang Split Select
Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax)
Do not use this option for USB interface programmer.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 227/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
90
Concurrent Gang Mode must be used in menu for USB multiple socket
programmers.
TopMax-8G(no longer since Jan. 2006) programs multiple E(E)PROMs up to
eight devices at the same time. In order to program multiple E(E)PROMs, users
must use TopMax-8G. TopMax-8G is especially useful when it is necessary
to program many devices with the same data simultaneously. TopMax-8G is
designed for multiple programming and it does not support set programming.
Split
When programming devices for a 16-bit or 32-bit environment, you will need to
split your data onto two or four devices.
NOTE: SPLITTING DATA is different from SETTING DATA. Putting
buffer data into multiple devices is called “SET DATA.” Maxloader
doesn’t support the SET DATA.
EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAMMING TWO 8-BIT EPROM AS FOLLOWS:
Byte $0000
Byte $0001
Byte $0002
Byte $0003
Byte $0000 Byte $0001
Byte $0002 Byte $0003
: :
1. Load a 16-bit file into the buffer.2. Select the target device from menu.
3. Insert the target device (#1) into the ZIF socket.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 228/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
91
4. Click on EVEN in Split data menu.
5. Program the device (#1).
6. Remove the device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into the ZIF socket.
7. Click on ODD.
8. Program the second device.
Now, you have two 8-bit EPROMs that have been programmed. The first
EPROM (#1) contains all the even address or low bytes and the second (#2)device contains all the odd address or high bytes.
EXAMPLE 2: PROGRAMMING FOUR 8-BIT EPROMS AS FOLLOWS:
Byte $0000 Byte $0001 Byte $0002 Byte $0003
Byte $0004 Byte $0005 Byte $0006 Byte $0007
Byte $0000
Byte $0001
Byte $0002
Byte $0003
Byte $0004
Byte $0005
Byte $0006
Byte $0007
:
: : : :
1. Select the target EPROM.
2. Load the HEX file (32-bit file) into the buffer.
3. Insert the first EPROM (#1) into the socket.
4. Invoke Word 0 in Split Data menu.
5. Program the mounted device.
6. Remove the programmed device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into
the socket. 7. Follow the same steps as above.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 229/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
92
After programming the 4th EPROM with Word 3, you will have four 8-bit
programmed EPROMs. The original file (32-bit) is split into four EPROMs that
contain 8-bit data in each device.
Config Option / Address
Device Address
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-Chip Start: Device Starting address for the data to be programmed in buffer.
-Chip End: Device Ending address for the data to be programmed in buffer.
-Buffer Start: Buffer Starting address for the data to be programmed.
-Buffer End: Buffer Ending address for the data to be programmed.
NOTE: Device size for different devices
Device Device Address
2716 0 - 7FF
2732 0 - FFF
2764 0 - 1FFF
27128 0 - 3FFF
27256 0 - FFFF
27010/1024 0 - 1FFFF
27020/2048 0 - 3FFFF
27040/4096 0 – 7FFFF
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 230/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
93
File Load
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-File Offset is subtracted from addresses from the file downloaded to the
programmer. For example, if you set File Offset to 1000h, then the downloaded
data minus 1000h would be placed into the buffer at the address specified by the
Buffer Start Address.
-Buffer Start Address is the address in the buffer where you want your
downloaded data to start. For example, if you set Buffer Start Address to 800h,
then the downloaded data only appears in the buffer beginning at address 800h.
File Save
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-Buffer Start: Starting address for data to be saved.
-Buffer End: Ending address for data to be saved.
Config Option / Auto Inc
The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain a serial
number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value.
Start : Start address of memory that contains serialized data
End : End address of memory
Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 231/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
94
User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased
by one to the previous data.
Config / Hardware test
A hardware test is designed to assist customers in confirming and diagnosing
problems relating to all programmers. If a hardware defect with a programmer
is suspected, we recommend the users to run this test in order to confirm
whether or not a problem has occurred with the programmer.
Config / Concurrent(gang) mode
Since the technology for USB allows to make a hub port available in a PC, we
introduce multiple socket programmers, ProMax (4G, 8G), also multiple single-
socked programmers can be operated as GANG PROGRAM MODE while the
same model are connected in a USB hub(4 or 8) . With the Start key in USB
programmer, a programmer command stream such as
Erase/Blank/Program/Verify/Security can be executed without PC softwarecontrol. You can execute individual socket with corresponding start button or
all socket together with pressing any of START button.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 232/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
95
Do not touch the device in socket until the operation stream is not finished
(stopped). Each operation in different socket can be displayed with blue color
bar in menu screen.
This pictures illustrates how to set any of Start key enable all 8 sockets.
This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a
start button for all others. So, customers don’t need to press individual button as
an auto programming mode
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 233/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
96
Enabling any button to be a “Start Key”
The individual socket with a serial number can be executed once the Start
button is pressed. After check the Enables START ALL button box in Configoption, all 8 sockets will be executed when you click on any of the “START”
key in Gang program. The START ALL button make all socket If the box is not
checked, individual socket will be executed once the button that contains a
serial number (actual programming socket) is clicked.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 234/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
97
Wait 10 – 30 seconds for recognizing all sockets and you can see each socket’s
serial number in GANG PROGRAM MODE. There two different features in theProMax programmer operations. One feature is that Data in buffer memory can be
simply duplicated into more one socket(duplication). Other feature is splitting
data in buffer to the sockets by same size(set) as much as the same buffer size of
selected 8-bit memory device. It calls “Set Programming.”
Program Opt.: Program options for automation programming. This operation
steam will be executed once click on individual socket or START ALL button is
clicked.
Serial NO.: Indicates all hardware serial numbers.
STATUS: Indicates executable command status in each programming location.
PASS: Indicates the number of devices passed.
FAIL: Indicates the number of devices failed.Reset : Set 0 in all of PASS / FAIL number.
Close : Quite the current menu windows.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 235/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
98
How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ?
If the target device is 8-bit EPROM such as 2764,128,256,512,101, make
the Set Program Mode disabled. The Set Program menu button will not be
appeared for all other(non-8 bit) device selection.
Set “Disable” in Set Program option which is not available for non-8 bit
EPROM.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 236/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
99
EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAM 8 OF 27128 EPROMS WITH SAME DATA:
1. Select the target device(27128) and Load a file that should be same size as
the selected Device size. The target devices could be any devices.
2. Click on the “Gang Program Mode” button.
3. Set Disable for the “Set program” in menu screen.
4. Insert as many as devices in the open sockets.
5. Click a button with serial number or the “START ALL” button and a
programming steam will be executed.
This diagram illustrates how to write(program) buffer data(0000-3FFF for
27128 selection) in eight sockets with same data. All devices in 8 sockets must
be identical and data in devices will be same after programming. If a device in a
group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be programmed;
then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as the failed
device
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 237/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
100
The next diagram illustrates how to travel the same buffer data(0000-3FFF
for 27128 selection) to the eight sockets.
Click for operating all
sockets at once,concurrent mode
Click for individual socket
operation
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 238/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
101
How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ?
This option is not available for all other devices that are not 8-bit EPROMs. The
menu screen below illustrates that there is no Set Program button because the
device selected DA28F320J5 is not 8-bit EPROM.
Set “Enable” in Set Program option that make all sockets with an EPROM are
available for “Set Programming.”
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 239/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
102
NOTE: Who may need the “set Programming ?”
A file can be fit in an EPROM and the file size becomes bigger than the
EPROM, so the large file should be split into more than one EPROMs. The
ProMax software will split a file up to 8 blocks and program them in different
EPROMs.
If the data blocks in buffer are less than the total socket numbers(4,8), same data
block can be programmed in different sockets. You can assign the same data
block in different socket because there will be empty sockets. So, you can assign
each socket for different data block.
EXAMPLE 2: SET PROGRAM FOR 8 OF 27128 EPROMS:
1. Select the target part 27128 and Load a file that should bigger than the
selected EPROM size(3FFF).
2. Click on the “Gang Program Mode” button.
3. Set Enable for the “Set program” menu
4. Assign a block file for each socket as
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 240/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
103
(customer must know the total length of file and how split the buffer data into
the EPROMs in sockets).
5. Click a button with serial number or the “START ALL” button and a
programming steam will be executed.
As illustrated in the diagram, data is routed to sockets in sequential order(the
first block of data goes to the first socket, the second block to the second, etc.).If a device in a group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be
programmed; then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as
the failed device
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 241/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
104
Config / Language
This option will help customer who want to use the Maxloader menu as native
language with the OS that is installed for own languages.
7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT
This section provides customer support information such as the return material
authorization policy as well as methods of obtaining E.E.Tools’ technical
assistance and software updates.
All programmers are designed to require a minimum of technical support for
both hardware and software. Since we make the product in USA, we supply
qualified programmers as trouble-free as possible.
1. Registration
A registration card is located in the user guide manual with the CD-ROMsoftware .Complete the card and returns it to E.E. Tools to become eligible for:
• Customer support, warranty service and technical assistance
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 242/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
105
• Notification and special pricing on new products and upgrades
Registration is particularly important if the programmer was purchased from a
dealer, a distributor or through your purchasing department. Why not take a
moment right now to complete the card.
2. Software Updates
Your programmer is designed to be highly flexible and programmable, allowingit to program a wide variety of chips. Consequently, when a problem does arise,
it can usually be fixed with just a free software update. The new software
updates are available from our WEB page at www.eetools.com
Use the new software if you have any other incorrect programming results.
3. Testing the Hardware
Make sure that your programmer works properly before you call us for
technical assistance. Refer to Hardware Test section in the Config menu.
4. Quick Self-Diagnostics
In order to provide accurate and fast technical assistance, we recommend thatyou check the following information before you call our technical support
department. We recommend that you obtain the latest software revision before
calling our support line with a software problem. Eighty percent of our technical
support calls result in asking the user to obtain the latest version of the software.
For USB programmers TopMaxII, UniMax, ChipMax2, you should install
the USB driver in your PC after install PC control software. The USB
driver is in either CD-ROM or C:\Program Files\EE Tools directory.
ProMax-4G will need the USB installation 4 times and ProMax-8G does 8
times. This installation should be done once you install the ProMax in your
PC. Be sure that you use the same USB port for the ProMax programmer ,
otherwise you have to install the USB drivers again for different port. Do
not power Off and ON in 30 seconds and you must wait over 30 seconds
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 243/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
106
once you un-plug an USB cable from PC(USB Hub) and plug-in the same
cable.
Be sure the device selected matches the device being used.
For multi-site programmer usage, make sure all devices are identical.
For a device that uses an adapter, be sure that the adapter is correctly
oriented, seated properly, and the ZIF socket lever is down.
Be sure power cord is securely attached to programmer and power pack to
wall socket.
Be sure that power switch is ON.
Be sure that the parallel cable (IEEE standard, 25 pins and wires) is
correctly and securely attached to the programmer and PC. The connection must
be direct; there cannot be any software keys or locks between the parallel port
and the programmer. Most switch boxes may also cause difficulties.
You may need to change your printer port [even though it is working fine
with your printer] because TopMax/Chip Max communicates with your
computer via the printer port in a bi-directional mode.
5. Contacting Customer Support
E.E.Tools provides telephone technical assistance during normal business hours
(9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Pacific time).
Please call our Technical Support Department or your local E.E.Tools’
distributor while you are at your computer and be prepared to repeat the
sequence of steps leading up to the problem.
Submit your support request to [email protected] or you may log-in
www.eetools.com and submit your request .
Have the following information ready when you call or send supportrequest to [email protected]:
- The invoice number for the user who bought programmer from E.E.Tools.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 244/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
107
- The distributor's name and the purchased date.
- The model & serial number found in the back side of programmer..
- The hardware software revision number from option info location at the
Maxloader software screen.
- Description of problem with error message.
- The exact part number and package type you are working with.
- The adapter part number for non-standard package.
6. Service Information
Before sending a unit in for service, call us at 408-263-2221 to
obtain a Return Authorization Number (RMA). We will not repair
your unit unless an RMA was issued.
Warranty Service: Please return the product in the original package
with proof of purchase to the below address. Clearly state in writing
the performance problem and send any leads, connectors and
accessories that you are using with the device.
Non-Warranty Service: Return the product in the original packaging to the
below address. Clearly state in writing the performance problem and return any
leads, connectors and accessories that you are using with the device. Customers
not on open account must include payment in the form of a money order or
credit card. For the most current repair charges contact the factory before
shipping the product.
Return all merchandise to E.E. Tools, Inc., with pre-paid shipping.
The flat-fee repair charge includes return ground shipping to addresses in North
America only. For overnight shipments and non-North America shipping fees
contact E.E. Tools. Inc.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 245/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
108
Electronic Engineering Tools, Inc
4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102
San Jose, CA 95134, USA.
Tel : (408)263-2221Fax : (408)263-2230
www.eetools.com
Include with the instrument your complete return shipping address,
contact name, phone number, and description of problem.
7. Limited One-Year Warranty
E.E. Tools, Inc., warrants to the original purchaser that its product and the
component parts thereof, will be free from defects in workmanship and
materials for a period of one year from the date of purchase.
E.E. Tools, Inc., will, without charge, repair or replace, at its option, defective
products or component parts. Returned products must be accompanied by proof
of the purchase date in the form of a sales receipt.
To obtain warranty coverage in the U.S.A., this product must be
registered by completing and mailing the enclosed warranty card to:
E.E. Tools, Inc., 4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102, San Jose, CA 95134, USA.
Within fifteen (15) days from proof of purchase
Exclusions: This warranty does not apply in the event of misuse or abuse of
the product or as a result of unauthorized alterations or repairs. It is void if
the serial number is alternated, defeated, or removed.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 246/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
109
E.E. Tools, Inc. shall not be liable for any consequential damages, including
without limitations to damages resulting from loss of use. Some states do not
allow limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation
or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific rights and you may have other rights, which
vary from state-to-state.Model Number:___________________ Date Purchased:______________
8. Useful Web Site Addresses/ Phone Numbers
EE Tools, Inc. ..................................... www.eetools.com
ALTERA.............................................www.altera.com
AMD ..............................................www.amd.com
INTEL .............................................. www.intel.com
ATMEL ..............................................www.atmel.com
CYPRESS ........................................... www.cypress.com
DALLAS SEMI. .................................www.dalsemi.comHITACHI ............................................ www.halsp.hitachi.com
INTEL ..............................................www.intel.com
ISSI ..............................................www.issi.com
LATTICE SEMI. ...............................www.latticesemi.com
MITSUBISHI......................................www.mitsubishi.com
MICROCHIP ...................................... www.microchip.com
MOTOROLA......................................www.motorola.com
NATIONAL SEMI. ............................www.national.com
NEC .............................................. www.nec.com
OKI SEMI...........................................www.okisemiconductor.com
PHILIPS SEMI. ..................................www.semiconductors.philips.comROHM ..............................................www.rohm.com
SEEQ ..............................................www.seeq.com
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 247/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
110
SILICON STORAGE .........................www.ssti.com
ST MICRO..........................................www.st.com
TEMIC ..............................................www.temic.com
T.I. ..............................................www.ti.com
TOSHIBA ........................................... www.toshiba.com
WAFERSCALE..................................www.waferscale.com
WINBOND ......................................... www.winbond.comXICOR ..............................................www.xicor.com
XILINX ..............................................www.xilinx.com
ZILOG ..............................................www.zilog.com
9. Programming Adapter Manufacturers
Compass Systems (Asia).................. www.compass21.com
EE Tools, Inc. ..................................... www.eetools.com
Emulation Technology........................www.1800adapter.com
Emulation Solutions............................www.adapters.com
Logical System....................................www.logicalsys
Iron Wood ........................................... www.ironwoodelectronics.com
10. EPROM Emulator Manufacturers
EE Tools, Inc. ..................................... www.eetools.com
Tech Tools .......................................... www.tech-tools.com
8. OTHER PRODUCTS
Optional EPROM Emulator
EeRom-8U : Memory Emulation System for R&D and Engineering Part
. Communication –USB Port (1.1)
- Operation Software-Wind98/ME/2000/XP
- Low Voltage Supports-3.3V/5V
- Target Connect - 32Pin Dip Cable (Standard)
- 32Pin PLCC POD (Option)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 248/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
111
- Buffer Memory – 8M,12ns SRAM ( 8bit)
- Download Speed – 1Mbyte/sec
- Reset Signal – Low/High Software Control
- Supports Device – E/EPROM : 2764-27080, 2864-28256
Flash Memory : 29512-29040
- Size – 98x 63x 22 (mm)
The requirement to use the Window graphical application is :
Processor: IBM PC or Compatible Pentium/100 MHz or better.
RAM : 5MB
DISK : 5MB
Port : USB
CD ROM Drive for Installation
OS : Windows 98/ME/2000/XP
Target Systems of EeRom-8U
Your target board required the following memory type for proper emulation
with EeRom-8U. The basic EeRom-8U supports 8Mbits with 45NS Memory.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 249/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
112
9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY
Comparison of NOR and NAND Flash technologies
Why NAND Flash
NAND-based flash is a low-cost high-capacity memory technology commonly
used in large data applications such as digital cameras, 3G cell phones, PDAs,
etc. In addition to using this data storage capability, manufacturers have found
it beneficial in many cases to program code into NAND flash devices.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 250/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
113
Embedded and mobile systems are increasingly using NAND flash for storage
because it has various advantages over other storage technologies. As always
though, life is a compromise and those advantages come with some limitations
that need to be addressed to provide a robust flash file system.
Hard disks are not a viable storage option for many embedded and handheld
systems because they are too big, too fragile and use too much power
Major difference is that NAND is shipped with marked bad blocks on the
device, while NOR chips are shipped defect free. Thus, one expects to
encounter some failures in NAND and should design accordingly.
How to Program NAND Flash
Since all Nand Flash contains BAD Block, NAND Flash developer should
know:
• What is the input parameter of ROM writer for supporting the pre-
programming in NAND flash memory
• Master image file.
• The number of NAND flash memory blocks. Refer to NAND flash memory
specification.
• The number of Reservoir blocks in NAND flash memory.(Refer to GBBM
specification.)
GBBM (Global Bad Block Management) manages the bad blocks of the whole
NAND flash memory.
Note: Usually, new developers for NAND Flash should have a solution
how to program their devices with NAND Flash semiconductor
engineers and programmer vendor’s software development engineer.
How to READ NAND Flash
There is no global standard file system for NAND Flash programming for
programmer vendors yet. Hence, customer who understand how to program
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 251/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
114
NAND Flash is not hard to expect that READ(copy) a NAND Flash is very
difficult project unless the customer knows all information how to program the
master NAND Flash. EE Tools support most NAND device with specialized
file systems and simple algorithm with ‘skipping bad blocks’. Please contact
support.eetools.com for further assistance. Visit the www.nandflash.com if you
want to know further information about NAND Flash memory.
10. GLOSSARY
BGA Ball Grid Array. A surface mount device with solder balls and a high pin
count, similar to PGA.
Bipolar PROM A fuse-link programmable PROM.
Blank Check A test performed by a device programmer to ascertain whether a device has
been programmed (partial or total) or is in a virgin state.
Buffer Data storage unit directly stored on CPU.
Checksum A number that results by adding up every element of a pattern. Typically
either a four or eight digit HEX number, it is a quick way to identify a
pattern, since it is very unlikely that two patterns will have the same
checksum.
Compare Reading a programmable device and displaying any discrepancies from the
desired pattern. Each error is displayed on the screen. This comparison is
slower to perform than a verify on the programmer.
Device Microchip or Integrated Circuit chip.
Die The silicon chip that is located within an IC package. It is a small rectangular
flat piece of silicon that has been fabricated with many transistors to
perform a specific function. It is glued into a plastic or ceramic package and
connected to the external metal interconnect pins of the IC with very small
bonding wires. It can be seen through the window of erasable EPROMs.
DIP Dual Inline Package. An IC package with two rows of through-hole pins,
usually on 0.1 pitch, 0.3 or 0.6 inches apart.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array. A very complex PLD. The FPGA usually
has an architecture that comprises a large number of simple logic blocks, a
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 252/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
115
number of input/output pads, and a method to make random connections
between the elements.
Functional Test A test that is performed following the programming of a PLD. The test
operates the device in its normal operating mode by simulating the inputs
and outputs that the part will experience in normal operation. To perform the
test, the engineer must supply a set of test vectors that describe normal
operation of the device so the device programmer can apply the specifiedstimulus and verify that the device is operating as designed. It is important to
perform a functional test on PLDs because, in many cases, the PLD cannot
be fully tested at the factory before programming so a defective PLD may
program correctly but fail the functional test. A properly designed functional
test will verify that the part meets the design specification, ensuring that the
device, the compiler, the programmer, and the engineer have all performed
their respective tasks correctly.
Fuse A metal connection within a PLD or memory that may be melted during
programming to break the circuit. These links typically carry input signals to
logic gates. Burning all the fuses except those that are required in the desired
circuit forms the desired circuit configuration. Since the fuses cannot betested nondestructively, fuse-like programmable devices cannot be 100%
tested at the factory and consequently expected programming yields are
usually 98-99%.
GAL Generic Array Logic. EEPROM based second generation PAL devices.
Gang Programmer A multiple-socket programmer that requires each device to be placed in a
socket before any can be programmed. See Concurrent Programmer.
HEX file A human-readable ASCII file that represents any binary data. Each byte in
the binary pattern is represented by two HEX characters (0-9, A-F) so that
any of the 256 possible bytes, which include both control and unprintable
characters, may be printed. The HEX file may also contain address or
checksum information. The pattern represented by the HEX file may berepresented by a binary file or any of the HEX file formats – any file format
may contain any pattern. The names of the HEX file formats (Intel, Motorola,
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 253/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 254/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
117
Non-Volatile The Characteristic of a memory that does not lose its contents when its
power is removed. Non-volatile memory is useful in microcomputer circuits
because it can provide instructions for a CPU as soon as the power is applied,
before secondary devices, such as disk, can be accessed. Non-Volatile
memory includes ROM, EPROM and EEPROM.
Oscillator A device that produces an alternating output current.
OTP One-time programmable. The characteristic of a memory device that can be programmed once but cannot be erased. When an EPROM is described as
OTP, this means that its die is erasable when exposed to ultraviolet light, but
because of its package, which is not transparent, it cannot be exposed to light
and thus it cannot be erased.
Package The plastic or ceramic that protects an IC die and connects it to the target
circuit.
PGA Pin Grid Array. A square, through-hold IC package that has pins located on a
square grid with 0.1000-inch pitch. It may have up to several hundred pins.
Used primarily for military and prototype designs.
PLCC Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier, A square plastic package that has J-shaped leads
on four sides. This can be surface mounted or placed in a socket for through-hole use. Available in 20 to 84 pins.
PLD Compiler A software package that allows an engineer to specify the functionality of a
PLD through a high-level language or schematic diagram. The software will
convert the design into a JEDEC or other file for the PLD programmer. PLD
compilers are available from numerous IC manufacturers and from third
parties. The packages from IC manufacturers support only one brand of
device and may be free, inexpensive or expensive. The most popular
compiler is PALASM (prices under $200, available from AMD sales offices
and representatives), which supports most of AMD’s line of PLDs with an
easy-to-learn high-level language. The compiler that probably offers the
highest level of functionality and flexibility is PLDmaster made by LogicalDevices. It supports most PLDs and offers a sophisticated input language
with full support for state machines and other complex constructs,
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 255/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 256/376
MaxLoader User’s Guide
119
commonly available in a reverse (mirror image) pin out used to simplify
circuit board layout. Usually 32 to 44 pins.
UV Erasable The characteristic of an EPROM that allows it to be erased with exposure to
short –wave ultra-violet light. This high-energy light can discharge the
floating-gate transistor cells that store bits in an EPROM. The most common
source of such light is a mercury vapor tube much like an ordinary
fluorescent tube, but without the phosphor that turns the UV light emitted bythe mercury into visible light. The light from ordinary fluorescent lamps or
sunlight generally takes years to erase an EPROM. All UV erasable parts
have a quartz windowed ceramic package that allows exposure with UV light.
Verify Reading a programmable device and comparing its contents to the desired
pattern for that device. This is a go/no-go test – it does not report what the
discrepancies are. See also: compare.
Word width The number of output pins that a memory device has. The most common size
for EPROMs is byte wide (8 bits) and “word” wide, or 16 bits. It can also
refer to the aggregate width of several memory devices used in a set.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 257/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS AR Rev1.05 / SC – Mayo 2007
Programador
PIC JDM PLUSProgramador de PICs, memorias EEPROM I2C y
memorias EEPROM MicroWire (zócalo incorporado)
RdSSEquipos Electrónicos
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 258/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 2 RdSS 2007
Tabla de contenidos
Características del Programador PIC JDM PLUS................................................3Listado de dispositivos soportados por el Programador PIC JDM PLUS ................3Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)............................................................................ 4Zócalo MicroWire ......................................................................................... 4Cómo colocar los PICs y memorias en los zócalos ............................................4
Software de programación ............................................................................ 6Configuración del IC-Prog ............................................................................. 6Configuración del WinPic800 .........................................................................7Configuración del PonyProg2000....................................................................7Configuración del Win Pic DL4YHF's PIC Programmer for Windows .....................7Circuito para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXX usando el conector ICSP...........9Precauciones y advertencias ....................................................................... 10Dimensiones ............................................................................................. 11
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 259/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
RdSS 2007 AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 3
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
Características del programador PIC JDM PLUS
• Soporta PICs de 8, 18, 28 y 40 pines de programación serial• Soporta Memorias EEPROM I2C• Soporta Memorias MicroWire de las líneas 93C, 59C y 35C (zócalo incluido)• Posee conector de programación IN-Circuit (ICSP) y led de actividad• Conexión directa a PC a través del puerto serie• No necesita alimentación externa, la toma desde el mismo puerto de la PC• Fabricado con materiales de primera calidad• No es compatible con adaptadores USB – serie o similares• No soporta dispositivos de programación paralela• Debido a la baja potencia presente en los puertos de las notebooks puede queeste programador no funcione en ellas
Listado de Memorias y Microcontroladores PIC soportados por elProgramador PIC JDM PLUS
I2C
24C01A, 24C02, 24C04, 24C08, 24C16, 24C32,
24C64, 24C65, 24C128, 24C256, 24C512,PCF8572, 8572, PCF8582, 8582, PCF8592, 8592,SDA2506, SDA2516, SDA2526, SDA2546,SDA2586, SDA3506, SDA3516, SDA3526, 4C016,GRS-003, GRN-004, GRN-008, GRX-006, GRX-007,KKZ06F, BAW658049, BAW57452, M8571, X24C01,24LC21
Memorias EEPROM
MicroWire
93C06, 93C14, 93C46, 93C56, 93C57, 93C66,93C76, 93C86, 59C11, 59C13, 59C22, CAT35C102,CAT35C104, CAT35C108
12C
12C508, 12C508A, 12C509, 12C509A, 12C671,12C672
12CE 12CE518, 12CE519, 12CE673, 12CE674
12F 12F629, 12F675
16C
16C433, 16C61, 16C62, 16C62A, 16C62B, 16C63,16C63A, 16C64, 16C64A, 16C65, 16C65A, 16C65B,16C66, 16C67, 16C71, 16C72, 16C72A, 16C73,16C73A, 16C73B, 16C76, 16C77, 16C505, 16C620,16C620A, 16C621, 16C621A, 16C622, 16C622A,16C710, 16C711, 16C712, 16C715, 16C716,16C717, 16C745, 16C765, 16C770, 16C771,16C773, 16C774, 16C781, 16C782, 16C923,16C924
16CE 16CE623, 16CE624, 16CE625
16F
16F73, 16F74, 16F76, 16F77, 16F83, 16F84,
16F84A, 16F627, 16F628, 16F630, 16F676,16F818, 16F819, 16F870, 16F871, 16F872,16F873, 16F873A, 16F874, 16F874A, 16F876,16F876A, 16F877, 16F877A
MicrocontroladoresPIC
18F
18F242, 18F248, 18F252, 18F258, 18F442,18F448, 18F452, 18F458, 18F1220, 18F1320,18F2220, 18F2320, 18F2439, 18F2455, , 18F2539,18F2550, 18F4220, 18F4320, 18F4439, 18F4455,18F4539, 18F4550, 18F6620, 18F6720, 18F8620,18F8720
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 260/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 4 RdSS 2007
En caso de utilizar un cable de extensión para conectar el programador a la PC,este debe ser del tipo apantallado para evitar errores de programación. El cable esdel tipo DB9 Macho a DB9 Hembra. En caso de querer fabricarlo la configuración espin a pin, uno a uno (Ej.: DB9H pin 1 con DB9M pin1). Este cable se puedeconseguir en cualquier casa de computación o electrónica.
Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)
La siguiente figura muestra la descripción de cada pin del conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)que se encuentra en la placa (ver precauciones y advertencias):
Zócalo para memorias MicroWire
Cómo colocar los PICs y las memorias en los zócalos
A continuación se detalla como se colocan en su correcta posición los PICs y lasmemorias en el programador PIC JDM PLUS. Respete las etiquetas de indicación,cada tipo de PIC o memoria tiene un lugar determinado en el programador.Observe el pin 1 correspondiente de cada PIC y memoria. Vea las precauciones yadvertencias.
En un microcontrolador PIC de 8 pines
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 261/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
RdSS 2007 AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 5
En un microcontrolador PIC de 18 pines
En un microcontrolador PIC de 28 pines
En un microcontrolador PIC de 40 pines
En una memoria EEPROM I2C de la línea 24CXX o equivalentes
En una memoria EEPROM MicroWire de las líneas 93CXX, 59CXX, 35CXXX oequivalentes
El zócalo para memorias deltipo MicroWire SOLO funcionacon el programa IC-Prog, no lohace con PonyProg
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 262/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 6 RdSS 2007
Software de programación
Este programador es compatible con cualquier software de programación quepermita la utilización de programadores con conexión a puerto serie del tipo JDM.A continuación se detalla la configuración de los software de programación másusados. Aunque los más recomendados para utilizar con el programador son el IC-Prog y el WinPic800 debido a que son los que pueden programar una mayor
cantidad de dispositivos.
Configuración del IC-Prog
La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuración básica para Windows:
Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.ic-prog.com/
La próxima imagen corresponde a la configuración extendida para Windows NT,Windows 2000 y Windows XP. En caso de usar otra versión de Windows la
configuración puede variar. Si el programador se comporta de forma extrañapruebe cambiar la interfaz y/o el valor del Retardo I/O. Para usar correctamente elprogramador JDM bajo estas versiones de Windows debe habilitar la opción“Habilitar Driver NT/2000/XP” para que el programa cargue los controladorescorrespondientes:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 263/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
RdSS 2007 AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 7
Configuración del WinPic800
Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.winpic800.com/
Configuración del PonyProg2000
Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.lancos.com/
Configuración del WIN PIC de DL4YHF's PIC Programmer forWindows
La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuración de este software deprogramación para Windows, si bien esta diseñado para funcionar sobre lasversiones más recientes de Windows, hay reportes de que en algunos equipos dichosoftware presenta errores al querer programar algunos dispositivos.Recomendamos utilizar este programador solamente en casos donde seaindispensable su uso. El tipo de interfaz a utilizar es la del “Programador COM84
para puerto serie” , y luego hacer una comprobación de la correcta instalación de
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 264/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 8 RdSS 2007
este programador presionando el botón denominado “¡Inicializar!”. Si estacomprobación es correcta ya puede utilizar este programa.
Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.qsl.net/dl4yhf
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 265/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
RdSS 2007 AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 9
Circuito auxiliar para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXXusando el conector para conexión In-Circuit (ICSP)
Para realizar este práctico circuito, necesita sólo dos componentes listados en elcircuito dado a continuación.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 266/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 10 RdSS 2007
Precauciones y advertencias
Las siguientes aclaraciones deben ser tenidas en cuenta a la hora de utilizar esteprogramador:
Los PIC’s son sensibles a las ESD (Descargas electrostáticas), asegúresede haberse descargado usted y su entorno previamente a retirar el chip de
su envoltorio protector.
Verifique que todos los pines se alinean correctamente en el zócalo delprogramador y luego inserte el chip cuidadosamente (las patitas del chipse rompen fácilmente). Si realiza tareas de desarrollo que implicanfrecuentes reprogramaciones puede ser buena idea utilizar un zócalo detransporte para proteger al PIC. Asegúrese que el programador seencuentra correctamente configurado según las recomendaciones para eldispositivo a programar.
Tenga cuidado en donde deja apoyado el programador ya que el contactocon superficies metálicas pueden dañar momentánea o permanentementeal programador y/o puerto de la PC
Nunca coloque o quite un dispositivo del zócalo del programador mientrasse esté programando o leyendo, ni cuando el led de actividad estéencendido. Tampoco coloque varios dispositivos a la vez para programar.
Al utilizar el conector IN-Circuit, tenga en cuenta que en el circuito endonde se encuentra el microcontrolador, el pin de MCLR NO DEBE estarconectado directamente a VCC ya que el programador eleva la señal deMCLR hasta los 13V para entrar en modo de programación. Si no verificaesto puede dañar momentánea o permanentemente al programador y/omicrocontrolador.
No trate de utilizar el programador en dispositivos que no están en la listaantes dicha; el uso incorrecto puede ocasionar un daño permanente en elprogramador y/o dispositivo.
Esta placa no es apta para el uso en equipos que se utilicen como soportesde vida, ni ninguna otra actividad que implique la confianza total en esteequipo.
El fabricante del programador NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE por el mal usoque el usuario pudiera darle, como así también por los daños ocasionadospor este en otros equipos a los que estuviese conectado (Ej.: PC,electrodomésticos, etc.). El usuario además da fe de que sabe utilizarlo deacuerdo a lo dicho en esta hoja de datos. La utilización del programadorimplica la aceptación de estas pautas.
Ante cualquier duda, por mínima que sea, comuníquese con nosotros.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 267/376
Programador PIC JDM PLUS
RdSS 2007 AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 11
Dimensiones
Ancho ................................................................................................37 mmLargo ............................................................................................... 123 mmAlto ...................................................................................................14 mmPeso ......................................................................................................90 g
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 268/376
Engineering Technical Laboratory Rev 2
ODESSA
2002
Microprocessor Tools
ETLUNIPROG control software
Win98/Win2000/WinXP
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 269/376
- 1 -
1.1 What You’ll NeedThe following section describe items that are you need to use ETLprogramming tools with ETLUNIPROG control software .
Hardware checklist Programmer boards :
-MC68HC05B6 board *-MC68HC705B16 board*-MC68HC05L28 board*-MC68HC11E9 board*-MC68HC11PA8 board*-TMS370Cx5x,Cx6x board*-TMS375C006 board*
Software checklist OS -MS-Windows ( Win98, Win2000, WinXP)Software tool -ETLUNIPROG software
1.2 Installing the ETLUNIPROG softwareThe ETLUNIPROG software designed for support early ETL programmingtools that arranged the parts of MS-DOS drivers for each separatedboard now combine into one software shell.To install the ETLUNIPROG software, follow these steps:1) Insert ETL CD into your CD-ROM drive **
2) Close all running application3) Follow prompts to install software to your hard drive4) Restart your PC when installation completed (optimal)
1.3 Starting the ETLUNIPROG softwareThe software used communicating with boards (listed above).The ETLUNIPROG user interface includes simple controls to activateboards and modes of operate.
After start the software click left mouse button on “Device” button andselect a programming board , click on “radio” button , next step to
set correct device from right side window. So make three simplesteps for Board/IC selection : 1 - Click device button; 2 - Click Board;3 - Confirm device (See Figure 1) When device is selected you shouldsee a message , that indicate selected device (according to supportedboard) into the message bar. For example MC68HC705B16 board
Already selected (See figure 2).*NOTE1: Programming boards description see Appendix 1**NOTE2: Download etluniprog .exe from http://www.etlweb.com
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 270/376
Now software ready to operate with selected board/IC. First of allmake sure, that board connected to PC communication port (LPT or
Com) and supply power to a target board. Second, choice menu Tools and click on Ports Options menu, to configuring your PC ports (See Figure 4). Change the Port number in case of necessary and set speed control slide to slow position (P II/III ) or middle position (P IV) ***
**NOTE3: applied to Normal Bi-directional Printer ports. For any other cases use Port expansion card, it can be connected to any free
ISA or PCI slot of your PC. MC68HC05L28 programming board
must be connected to free Serial Port (Com1-Com4).
- 2 -
Figure 1 (Select Device)
Figure 2 (MC68HC705 board/IC already selected)
STEP1
STEP3
STEP2
Board/IC Selected
All control buttons unlocked and ready to operate
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 271/376
- 3 -
Figure 4 (Select Port options menu)
Set LPT port numberI/O base addr. $03F8 /LPT1/
I/O base addr. $02F8 /LPT2/ Set LPT port speed control
Set Serial port number
I/O base addr. $0378 /Com1/ I/O base addr. $0278 /Com2/
Figure 5 (Port settings inset)
Now choice Program Sequence or Read Sequence docked panel according with your needs, then press a button to activate control and press Start button to begin operation (See Figure 6)
Figure 6 (Button activation )
STEP1
STEP2
Activated
Docked panel read sequence
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 272/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 273/376
If after start you should see message similar to this one (Figure 8), check next items: 1) Power supply connection is present on target board? 2) Interface cable (LPT or Serial cable) attached to target board or PC?
3) All contacts in the target socket is good? 4) Explored IC not damaged?
Figure 8 (Error message)
If after start you should see massage about successful, when operation completed, save data into a file or make changes in the data array (Dump Editor ) according with your needs. Than click Dump Editor button:
1 2 3 4 5 6Figure 9 (Common buttons meaning)
Common buttons meaning:
1 - Dump Editor button 2 - Description button 3 - Open file button 4 - Save button 5 - Print button 6 - Help button (This manual)
The data array included all 64K address space (it reserved for future needs) from $0000 to $FFFF. In case of necessary to load dump
contents less, than specified please use offset control function.
For example: there is a need to load into data array 256 bytes file , that started from address $0000 for EEPROM data location of MC68HC705B16 microcontroller, that located from $0100 to $01FF.
So follow next steps: Click Open file button (see figure 9),
- 5 -
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 274/376
00000000 38 67 0C 75 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000010 01 12 01 26 01 6A 01 54 01 30 01 74 01 94 00 0000000020 01 8E 01 54 01 6A 01 98 01 04 01 20 01 30 00 0000000030 01 94 01 92 00 88 00 56 00 88 01 92 01 92 00 0500000040 01 8E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 0000000050 00 00 46 41 3C 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000060 55 AA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000070 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000080 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000090 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000000D0 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 12 34000000E0 56 57 00 61 6C 70 68 61 00 34 AA 55 5A A5 00 00000000F0 01 10 92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 0E 15 0E
Figure 10 (Example file)
then disable “Load Entry File” flag, enter addresses and click OK button
Now you can find loaded data into address array according with adjusted offset value into required address space.
Figure 11 (Offset settings and result array)
2.0 Maintenance of the ETLUNIPROG software
For any troubles, such as disabling string window, progress bar and etc., click Tool panel and chose ”Reset To Default” button then click it to restore all previous correct settings.
To uninstall the ETLUNIPROG software tool, click Icon My Computer, then click Control Panel and ADD/REMOVE programs button and
remove it in case of necessary.
- 6 -
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 275/376
APPENDIX 1:
-7 -
MC68HC705B16 PROG. BOARD.Supported devices: MC68HC05B6,
MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16,MC68HC05B32, MC68HC705B16,MC68HC705B32, MC68HC05X16,MC68HC05X32, MC68HC705X16
MC68HC05B6 PROG. BOARD.Supported devices:MC68HC05B6,MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16,MC68HC05B32
MC68HC11PA8 PROG. BOARD.Supported devices: MC68HC11PA8,MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11KA1,MC68HC11PA2
MC68HC05L28 PROG. BOARD.Supported device:MC68HC05L28
TMS375C006 PROG. BOARD.
Supported devices:TMS375C006, TMP375C706
TMS370Cx5X PROG. BOARD.Supported devices:TMS370C756(A), TMS370C758(A)
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 276/376
Errata (MC68HC11PA8 Prog. Board):
When you using MC68HC11PA8 programming board with ETLUNIPROG
software , click ERASE button for every WRITE procedure. (Applied to all supported devices MC68HC11KA1, MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11PA8, MC68HC11P2).
ATTENTION: DON’T click LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for MCU’s with modify bootstrap loader (for example mask set 0D58J, 1D58J) - this modes can damage CONFIG register data or data will be lost.
After click Start button you should see message similar to this one:
Click No for cancel CONFIG register programming.
- 8 -
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 277/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 16 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9
BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina
BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9Procedure of recognition and connection to the Bosch EDC16/EDC16+/ME9 ECUsIdentify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 278/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 17 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Di queste 14 piazzole noi utilizzeremo le prime 10 a sinistra.
Of those 14 pads we’ll use the first 10 at left.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 279/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 280/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 19 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzola precedentementestagnata.
Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins.Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.
Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated.Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 281/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 20 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Ripetere l’intera procedura per il secondo strip cercando di mantenere un corretto allineamento.
Repeat the whole procedure for the second strip wanting to maintain a correct alignment
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 282/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 21 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegamento del connettoreLa banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra ( piazzola uno )
In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connector’s connectionThe colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 283/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 22 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong
DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/SsangyongIdentificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline DELPHI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralinaPiazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la .Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins.Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste. Vedi procedura EDC16In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash del Micro
DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/SsangyongProcedure of recognition and connection to the DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/SsangyongIdentify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.The pads are situated in all the DELPHI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from thepicture.Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated.Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.(see EDC16 description )In this Ecu the Maps are into the Microprocessor Flash Memory
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 284/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 23 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegare l’adattatore “DELPHI-MOTOROLA” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1.Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra(piazzola uno )In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connect the “DELPHI-MOTOROLA” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 .Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 285/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 24 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per loscollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegarel’alimentazione come descrittoPIN 1 GNDPIN 4 +12VccDopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccaresul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picturePIN 1 GNDPIN 4 +12VccStart the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 286/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 25 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki
MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/SuzukiIdentificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline MARELLI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralinaMJET In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash del MicroMJET+ M58W016 In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash M58W016
MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/SuzukiProcedure of recognition and connection to MARELLI MJET Fiat/Opel/SuzukiIdentify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.The pads are situated in all the MARELLI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from thepicture.MJET In this Ecu the Maps are inside the Microprocessor Flash MemoryMJET+ M58W016 In this Ecu the Maps are inside the M58W016 Flash Memory
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 287/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 26 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
MJET
Rimuovere la resistenza da 0 ohm come indicato e saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 6 pins )Non è necessario risaldare la resistenza dopo l’operazione.
Remove the 0 ohm resistor and weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )It’s not necessary ti put in place again the 0 ohm resistor after the reprogram operations.
MJET+ M58W016
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 288/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 27 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegare l’adattatore “MARELLI MJET” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1.Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra(piazzola uno )In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connect the “MARELLI” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 .Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 289/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 28 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativoMPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per loscollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegarel’alimentazione come descrittoPIN 1 GNDPIN 50,23 +12VccDopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccaresul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If youwant to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picturePIN 1 GNDPIN 50,23 +12Vcc
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed intoread/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 290/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 291/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 30 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )
Weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 292/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 31 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegare l’adattatore “SIEMENS” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1.Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra(piazzola uno )In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connect the “SIEMENS” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 .Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 293/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 32 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativoMPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegarel’alimentazione come descrittoConnettore 2PIN G4 +12VccConnettore 3PIN C3 +12VccPIN H4 GNDDopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccaresul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in pictureConnector 2PIN G4 +12VccConnector 3PIN C3 +12VccPIN H4 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed intoread/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 294/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 295/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 34 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegare l’adattatore “SIEMENS” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1.Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra(piazzola uno )In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connect the “SIEMENS” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 .Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 296/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 35 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativoMPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per loscollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 297/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 36 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi /LandRover 2.7D
SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7DIdentificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7DProcedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WS-201
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 298/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 37 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )
Weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 299/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 300/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 39 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativoMPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per loscollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegarel’alimentazione come descritto
Connettore 3PIN K4 +12VccPIN K3 +12VccPIN M1 GNDDopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccaresul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If youwant to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in pictureConnettor 3PIN K4 +12VccPIN K3 +12VccPIN M1 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed intoread/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 301/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 40 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Bosch ME9.7 Mercedes Benz SLK 350
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.Weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 302/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 41 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Collegare l’adattatore “Marelli” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1.Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra(piazzola uno )In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.
Connect the “Marelli” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 .Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 303/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 42 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Alimentazione:Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativoMPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegarel’alimentazione come descrittoConnettore DestroPIN 15 +12VccPIN 16 +12VccPIN 2 GNDDopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccaresul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.
Power supply:For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and theMpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picturePIN 15 +12VccPIN 16 +12VccPIN 2 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed intoread/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 304/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 43 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
BOSCH BMSK BMW MOTORCYCLE
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina
Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzolaprecedentemente stagnata.
Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins. Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from thepicture. Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previouslystagnated. Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond
between the tracks.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 305/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 44 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
SIEMENS MSV70 BMW
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 306/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 307/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 46 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
Siemens SIM266 Mercedes
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 308/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 47 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
SIEMENS PPD1.1 VAG
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 309/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 48 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
CONTRATTO DI LICENZA D'USO E GARANZIA DEL SOFTWARE
LICENZA PER IL PRODOTTO SOFTWARE:
Il Prodotto è protetto dalle leggi e dai trattati sulla proprietà intellettuale. Il Prodotto viene concesso in licenza d'usonon esclusiva, con il vincolo della non cessione a terzi, non viene venduto.
1. CONCESSIONE DI LICENZA. In questo articolo del Contratto, sono descritti i diritti generali dell'Utente relativiall'installazione e all'utilizzo del Prodotto. I diritti di licenza descritti nel presente articolo sono soggetti a tutte le altrecondizioni del presente Contratto.
1.1 Proprietà - Divieto di cessione. Il Prodotto è e rimane di nostra esclusiva proprietà , fatto quindi espresso divietoall'Utente di venderlo, darlo in licenza o sub-licenza, distribuirlo o cederlo a terzi o comunque di consentirne l'uso daparte di terzi a titolo oneroso.
1.2 Divieto di modifica. L'Utente si obbliga a proteggere i diritti di proprietà, in particolare si obbliga a non modificare,alterare o aggiungere parti al Prodotto, né ad incorporarlo in tutto od in parte in altri programmi.
2. DESCRIZIONE DI ALTRI DIRITTI E RESTRIZIONI
2.1 Attivazione Software. Al fine di esercitare i propri diritti sul Prodotto Software, quali illustrati nel presentecontratto, l'Utente riceve una chiave di abilitazione hardware. La perdita della stessa può portare l’utente a non poterpiù esercitare diritti sul prodotto.
2.2 Trattamento dei dati personali. La registrazione dei dati avviene sulla base e nel rispetto delle leggi applicabili
sulla tutela delle persone e di altri soggetti rispetto al trattamento dei dati personali.
2.3 Protezione delle Copie. Il Prodotto Software potrebbe contenere una tecnologia di protezione delle copie perimpedire la duplicazione non autorizzata del Prodotto Software oppure potrà richiedere il supporto originale perl'utilizzo del Prodotto Software nel Dispositivo. È illegale effettuare copie non autorizzate del Prodotto Software oppureeludere la tecnologia di protezione delle copie contenuta nel Prodotto Software.
2.4 Restrizioni sulla Decodificazione, sulla Decompilazione e sul Disassemblaggio. E' fatto divieto all'Utente didecodificare, decompilare o disassemblare il Prodotto,fatto salvo quanto espressamente consentito da disposizioni dilegge vigente in materia.
2.5 Separazione di Componenti. Il Prodotto è concesso in licenza come un prodotto unitario. Le sue singole parti
componenti non potranno essere separate per l'utilizzo su più di un Dispositivo a meno che ciò non sia espressamenteautorizzato nel presente Contratto o dalle disposizioni di legge vigente.
2.6 Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti. In alcuni casi, potrà fornire all'Utente un servizio supporto tecnico clienti relativoal Prodotto ("Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti"). L'utilizzo del Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti è disciplinato dallepolitiche e dai nostri programmi.
2.7 Trasferimento del Software. E' fatto divieto al licenziatario iniziale del Prodotto Software di trasferire il presenteContratto e il Prodotto Software sia a titolo oneroso che gratuito.
2.8 Durata. Il presente contratto ha una durata indeterminata, dando facoltà ad entrambe le parti di recedere inqualsiasi momento senza obbligo di preavviso.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 310/376
MPCProg 5xx Rev. E del 27/11/2005
Manuale operativo – User manual pag. 49 di 49
CMD Technologies s.r.l.
3. DIRITTI SULLA PROPRIETÀ INTELLETTUALE.
3.1 Diritti.
La titolarità e i diritti sulla proprietà intellettuale relativi al Prodotto (inclusi, in via esemplificativa, ogni immagine,fotografia, animazione, video, audio, musica, testo, "applet", ecc. integrati al Prodotto Software), il materialestampato accluso e qualsiasi copia del Prodotto, sono di nostra proprietà . L'Utente non potrà riprodurre il materialestampato accluso al Prodotto.
Il Cliente assicurerà la Sua piena collaborazione, laddove vi fosse necessità, al fine di far constatare la titolarità deinostri diritti , adempiendo a tutti gli eventuali opportuni incombenti per la migliore tutela degli stessi.
4. LIMITAZIONI DI RESPONSABILITA'.
4.1 Limitazione di responsabilità.
NELLA MISURA MASSIMA CONSENTITA DALLA LEGGE IN VIGORE, IN NESSUN CASO SAREMO RESPONSABILI PER GLIEVENTUALI DANNI SPECIALI, ACCIDENTALI, DIRETTI O INDIRETTI (INCLUSI, SENZA LIMITAZIONI, IL DANNO PER LAPERDITA O MANCATO GUADAGNO, INTERRUZIONE DELL'ATTIVITA', PERDITA DI INFORMAZIONI O ALTRE PERDITE
ECONOMICHE) DERIVANTI DALL'USO DEL PRODOTTO O DAL SUO MANCATO UTILIZZO OVVERO DALLA FORNITURA ODALLA MANCATA FORNITURA DEL SERVIZIO DI SUPPORTO TECNICO, ANCHE NEL CASO , LA NOSTRARESPONSABILITA' COMPLESSIVA AI SENSI DEL PRESENTE CONTRATTO SARA' LIMITATA ALL'IMPORTO MAGGIORETRA QUELLO EFFETTIVAMENTE PAGATO PER IL PRODOTTO E LA SOMMA EQUIVALENTE A CINQUE (5) EURO NELLAVALUTA LOCALE.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 311/376
SCHEDA ELIMINAZIONE CODE
AUDI
AUDI A6 1.8 TURBO0 261 204 818
ELIMINAZIONE TOTALE
Aprire la centralina rimuovendo il coperchio tramite
le 4 viti poste nella parte inferiore.
Localizzare la memoria seriale 24C04 come evidenziato
nella figura accanto.
Riprogrammare la memoria con il file allegato
Rispettare il riferimento al PIN 1 come indicato in
figura per non danneggiare la memoria.
01/08/02 Pagina 1 di 1 Ul timo aggiornamento : Proprieta' esclusiva SEA ogni riproduzione totale o parziale e' vietata.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 312/376
LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE CLIO 2002->YAHOO – AUTENTIQUE
Vista del immo box:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 313/376
Desoldar la EEPROM ( 93c66 ) y limpiar la superficie con limpiacontacto ( alcohol isopropilico ) para sacar la capa protectora.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 314/376
Una vez desoldada la Eeprom colocarla en pinza de lactura yseleccionar con el pulsador del programador hasta llegar a laPosición 93xxxx.
Abrir el programa PONY-PROGRAM1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 93662 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo
La ubicación de los 6 pares para el CLIO YAHOO ( ESTÁNDAR )
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 315/376
Mediante las cordenadas indicadas a continuación se debera armar elCodigo de 12 digitos del vehiculo.
LECTURA DE DUMP CLIO YAHOO
MANUAL
PONY 93C66
MANUAL
1 FILA 110 CASILLERO 13
2 FILA 170 CASILLERO 14
3 FILA 190 CASILLERO 5
4 FILA 110 CASILLERO 12
5 FILA 190 CASILLERO 4
6 FILA 170 CASILLERO 13
La ubicación de los 6 pares para el CLIO AUTENTIQUE ( FULL)
FULL
1 FILA 120 CASILLERO 7
2 FILA 180 CASILLERO 10
3 FILA 1A0 CASILLERO 7
4 FILA 120 CASILLERO 6
5 FILA 1A0 CASILLERO 66 FILA 180 CASILLERO 9
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 316/376
Immo de derby y otros vehículos, como la eurovan, etc, para leerlo se debe deescoger con el boton derecho del Vag-pin el immo tipo derby y colocar el Sw de laparte de abajo hacia el lado derecho, si no marcara error en pinzas.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 317/376
INMO VOLKSWAGENGOL – SAVEIRO – FOX – SURAN – SANTANA - QUANTUM
Vista externa del IMMO box.
Vista interna del IMMO box
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 318/376
Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:
Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.Explicación en el: IC-PROG:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 319/376
1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c562 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 320/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal ydeberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0018:
0018: 0000 0000 5632 394B 4F53 5441 4C09 0A3D
Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:
090A PASARLO A DECIMAL
2314 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 321/376
Explicación en el software PONY-PROG
1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 93562 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 322/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal ydeberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000030:
30
) 00 00 00 00 56 32 39 48 - 4F 53 54 41 4C 09 0A 3D
Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:
090A PASARLO A DECIMAL
2314 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 323/376
Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpetacorresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para el
Programa IC-PROG:
KOSTAL
Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en elProgramador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROGUna vez seleccionada la memoria:
IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo
Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL KostalEl archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar
Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione:COMANDO / Programar todo.
Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estaraVirginizado
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 324/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 325/376
INMO VOLKSWAGENPOLO VALEO / CADDY VALEO / TRANSPORTER 2001->
Vista externa del IMMO box.
Vista interna del IMMO box
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 326/376
Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:24xxx en el Programador y abrir el software:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 327/376
Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.Explicación en el: IC-PROG:
1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04
2
IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE deDe la barra de herramientas.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 328/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 329/376
Explicación en el software PONY-PROG
1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / 12C Bus 8bit eeprom / 24042 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 330/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 00001B0:
0001B0 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF - FF FF 00 03 24 5F D8 0C
Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:
0CD8 PASARLO A DECIMAL
3288 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 331/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 332/376
INMO VOLKSWAGENGOL – SAVEIRO – FOX – SURAN – SANTANA - QUANTUM
Vista externa del IMMO box.
Vista interna del IMMO box
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 333/376
Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 334/376
Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.Explicación en el: IC-PROG:
1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c562 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 335/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal ydeberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0010:
0010: A4E9 5201 22F2 56C3 E9C6 DA00 871D 0061
Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:
22C3 PASARLO A DECIMAL
8899 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 336/376
Explicación en el software PONY-PROG
1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 93562 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 337/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal ydeberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000020:
000020) A4 E9 52 01 22 F2 56 C3 – E9 C6 DA 00 87 1D 00 61
Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:
22C3 PASARLO A DECIMAL
8899 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 338/376
Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpetacorresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para elPrograma IC-PROG:
MEGAMOS / DELPHI naftaMEGAMOS / DELPHI diesel
Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en elProgramador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROGUna vez seleccionada la memoria:
IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo
Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL Megamos –delphi. ,el archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar
Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione:COMANDO / Programar todo.
Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estaraVirginizado
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 339/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 340/376
INMOVILISADORES INFORMACION
1} LOS TIPO A SON LOS QUE TIENEN LA MEMORIA LEJOS DEL FILTRO YSE PINSAN CON EL CAIMAN LOS 2 PINES LATERALES (A MANERA QUEQUEDEN UNIDOS) DE LOS 3 PINES QUE SE ENCUENTRAN JUNTOS EN LAPARTE DE TRASERA DE LA TABLETA
2} LOS TIPO B TIENEN LA MEMORIA DETRÁS DEL FILTRO
3) LOS DE DERBI TIENEN LA MEMORIA EN
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 341/376
POSICION DE COLORES PARA LA PINZA DE POINTER. LA MARCA ESTÁDEL LADO DEL COLOR VERDE Y DEL ROJO
3} LAS REFERENCIASPARA PINSAR LASMEMORIA SON:
LAS 2 MARCAS QUE TIENE LA PINSA VAN HACIA EL PUNTO QUE TIENELA MEMORIA O LEYENDO EL GRABADO DE LAS LETRAS LAS MARCASVAN A LA IZQUIERDA
NO ENCENDER ANTES DE PINZAR Y APAGAR ANTES DE DESPINZAR O LAMEMORIA SE BORRARÁ
OJO:
<<ALGUN PROCEDIMIENTO MAL HECHO Y NO HABRA
RETROCESO CAUSARÁ DAÑOS AL EQUIPO>>
4} ATOS, MEMORIA 95040 PARA ABRIR BUFER SE PONE 25XX POSICIONESDEL NUMERO
10--42 37 9220--42 37 9230--42 37 92
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 342/376
5} PLATINA, RENAULT MEMORIA 93C66 POSICIONES DE LOS NÚMEROSLEER A (8 o 16) BITS
10C 117 10D 10C 12710D 116 17C 17E 18810E 119 195 194 1A710F 118 10A 10B 124110 10B 192 193 1A4111 10A 17D 17C 189
EL CABLE CAFÉ A LA REFERENCIA PINTADA DE AMARILLO
6} NÚMERO DEL ESCANER:
T CODE 635434
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 343/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 344/376
INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA LECTURADEL DUMP DEL DECODIFICADOR
RENAULT
CLIO 2 1998 / 2001 - KANGOO - MASTER
TWINGO 2000->
MAGANE 4 PTAS 2004 ->
Vista del decodificador
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 345/376
Abrir la caja del decodificador con cuidado de nolastimar la plaqueta
Se debe desoldar la memoria 93c46 de la plaqueta y colocar en lapinza de lectura.Abrir el programa PONY – PROG y seleccionar la la siguientememoria:
Dispositivo / microwire16 Eeprom / 9346
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 346/376
Realizar la lectura y guardar el archivo con la Extensión .BIN
Una vez Guardado, enviar el archivo por correo
electronico a:
y le sera devuelto los 32 digitos del transponder de esedecodificador.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 347/376
INMO PEUGEOT 106 / CITROEN SAXOPARTNER HASTA 2000 / BERLINGO HASTA 2000
Vista externa del IMMO box.
Vista interna del IMMO box
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 348/376
Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:
93XXXX en el Programador y abrir el software:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 349/376
Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.Explicación en el: IC-PROG:
1
IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / Microwire Eeprom / 93c572 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 350/376
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra al FINAL de la LINEA 0008:
0008: 009F 9F03 0303 0350 5055 5558 5838 3819 Y.. PUX8 .
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 351/376
Peugeot 206Procedimiento para REMAPEAR la
computadora de injeccion
Peugeot 206 nafta modelo 1997 – 2002 1.6Computadora BOSH MP 7.2
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 352/376
1 Saque los tornillos y la tapa de la computadora2 Sacar la plaqueta y ubicar la Eeprom 24c02 donde se alojaEl codigo a Remapear
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 353/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 354/376
Para poder REMAPEAR la Eeprom se debe“DESOLDAR” la memoria 24c02Conectar la memoria a la Pinza de lectura y abrir
El programa IC Prog / seleccionar:
1 Dispositivo / IC Eeprom / 24c022 Ir a Archivo / Abrir Archivo y buscar
dentro de la carpeta PEUGEOT 206 el Archivo“peugeot 206 bosh mp72 remapeo.hex”
3 Una vez cargado en la pantalla el DUMPPresionar el boton de grabar:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 355/376
Una vez grabada la Eeprom, soldar la memoriaen la plaqueta, armar la computadora yreconectar la ECU al auto ( no es necesario cortarningun cable ni pin )El auto dara arranque sin necesidad de
transponder y no perdera la información si sedesconecta la bateria.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 356/376
LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE ALARMAGM VECTRA 1998->
Vista de la central de ALARMA:
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 357/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 358/376
Ubicación de la Eeprom ( 93lc46 ) donde se aloja el codigo
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 359/376
Antes de leer la Memoria, se debe puentear el cristal, como se indicaEn el siguiente grafico.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 360/376
La lectura del pin code se debe realizar mediante el:PONY PROGRAM
1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 93462 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE.
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 361/376
Ejemplo:
Si la lectura de la Eeprom se hizo de forma correcta, en la columnaFinal ( numeros color ROSADO ) se debera leer el numero CompletoDe chasis del vehiculo:
El codigo en este Ejemplo se encuentra en la LINEA 000070:
7155 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 362/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 363/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 364/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 365/376
1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04
2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.
Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )
Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:
El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0138:
0138: 00CA 0013 00FF 00FF 00F7 0060 0007 0002
6007 PIN CODE
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 366/376
Untitled Document
« BACK
Airbag
When an explosion occurs in an airbag or the SRS light is turned on accidentally, commonly the airbag controller should beeplaced since the traditional tools cannot clean out the trouble code. Actually, the controller can be used normally againfter cleaning the trouble code under the condition that there is no damage to the controllers hardware.
With Tech2 this trouble codes like this:
With PINReader this trouble codes like this:
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 367/376
Untitled Document
After “Clear Crash Codes” with PINReader :
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 368/376
Untitled Document
file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 369/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 370/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 371/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 372/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 373/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 374/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 375/376
8/16/2019 CURSO 2008 EPROMS
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/curso-2008-eproms 376/376